HP Home Theater System User Manual
HP Digital Enter tainment Center User â s Guide
The only warranties for HP products and ser vices are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and ser vices. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. HP assumes no responsibility for the us e or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP . This document contains proprietar y information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of HP . Hewlett-Packard Company P .O. Box 4010 Cupertino, CA 95015-4010 USA © 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard De velopment Company , L.P . This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certa in U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protecti on technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless other w ise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098, and 4,907,093 licensed for limited viewing uses only . FireWire and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer , Inc. HP supports lawful use of technology and does not endorse or encourage the use of its products for purposes other than those permitted by copyright law . Intel, Pentium, Intel Inside, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries/ regions. Microsoft, the Microsoft logo, Windows, and W indows XP are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information in this docu ment is subject to change without notice. W arnings and notes Color-coded warnings and notes with additional text contain important inform ation. Sample warnings and notes are displayed on this page. w A warning describes information you need to avoid possible personal injury , damage to equipment, or irrecoverable data loss. T ext set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. Read and follow all warnings. n A note describes important information you need.
T able of Contents T able of Contents iii T able of Contents Before Y ou Begin ..................... 1 Welcome ............................ ................................ 1 Benefits and Features......... ................................... 2 Functional Overview ............................. 3 Front Panel ....................... ................................... 3 Memory Card Reader ........... ................................ 5 Back Panel ....................... ................................... 6 Cleaning the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter ............................ 9 Shipping the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter ............................ 9 Keyboard ........................................... 10 Wireless Keyboard Operatio n ............................. 12 Replacing the Keyboard Batt eries......................... 13 Remote Control ................................... 14 Remote Control Buttons ...... ................................. 14 Remote Control Operation . ................................. 16 Installing the Remote Control Batteries .................. 16 Safety Information ................. 17 AC Power Safety Warnings .................. .............. 17 Installation Over view ............ 19 System Audio/Video Connections ....... 20 System Integration .......... .................................... 20 System Diagram ............... ................................. 22 Installation Guidelines ........................ 24 Placement and Ventilation Requirements ............... 25 Basic Setup ......................................... 27 Setting Up the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter .......................... 27 Inventory ............................................ 29 Cables Included ................. ................................ 30 Connecting Audio ................... 33 Audio Overview ..................................34 Audio Output Connectors .... ................... ............. 34 Sound Connector Jacks ....... ................................ 35 Speaker Types ................... ................................ 35 Speaker Configurations ...... ................... ............. 36 T ypical Audio Connection ..................... 38 TV Audio Connection ...........................39 Connecting TV Audio.......... ................................ 39 A V Receiver Audio Connection ............. 40 AV Receiver Equipment Ov erview ........................ 40 2.0 Home Stereo Installati on ............... ................ 41 2.1 Home Stereo Installati on ............... ................ 42 4.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 43 5.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 44 7.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 45 Digital Home Theater Audio . .................. ............. 46 Powered Speaker Audio Connection .... 48 2.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 49 4.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 50 5.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 51 7.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 52 Digital Powered Speakers ... ................................ 53 Monitor Speakers ............... ................... ............. 54 Audio In Connections ........................... 55 FM Radio Antenna ............................... 56
iv HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting V ideo Out ............ 57 Video Out Over view ........................... 58 Video Out Connection Overview ......................... 58 Video Out Connectors ......... ............................... 59 Component Video Settings ... ............................... 60 TV Display Overview ........... ............................... 61 Audio and Video Switching Overview .................. 61 Using the Remote Control wi th Your TV ................. 62 T ypical Video Out Connections ............. 63 Video Out to TV ................................... 64 Video Out from A V Receiver to TV ....... 66 Video Out to Monitor .......................... 68 Video Out to TV and Monitor ............... 69 Connecting TV Source In ......... 71 TV Source Overview ............................ 72 TV Signal Source Overview ................... .............. 72 Additional HDTV Informatio n ............................... 74 TV Source Connectors Over view .......................... 75 TV Source Connectors ...... .................... .............. 76 T ypical TV Source Connections ............. 78 Antenna Connection ............................ 80 Antenna (NTSC) ................. ............................... 80 Antenna (ATSC) .................. ............................... 81 Antenna (NTSC and ATSC) ................................. 82 Cable Connection ................................ 83 Cable (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC)...................... 83 One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) .............................. 84 Two Cable TV Boxes, or Two Digital Cable Receivers (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) ................ 86 Cable Only (NTSC) ............. ............................... 88 One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (N TSC) ........................... 89 Two Cable TV Boxes, or Two Digital Cable Receiver s ............................... 91 Satellite Connection ............................. 93 One Satellite Receiver (NTS C) ............................. 93 Two Satellite Receivers (NTSC) ............................ 95 Infrared T ransmitter Connection .......... 97 Infrared Transmitter Overvi ew .............................. 97 Infrared Transmitter Insta llation ........... ................. 99 Connecting V ideo Equipment . ...........................101 Video Equipment Over view ............... 102 Connectors ....................... ............................... 102 Video Equipment Connection Overview .............. 103 T ypical Video Equipment Connections ...................................... 104 VCR Connection ................................. 105 VCR Direct In Connection ... ............................... 105 Wall to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cable ............. 106 Video Camera Connection ................. 109 Connecting a Digital Video Camcorder .............. 109 Connecting an Analog Camcorder ..................... 112 Connecting the Network .......113 Peripheral Connection Overview ....... 114 T ypical Network Connections ............ 116 Connecting the Wireless Network Antenna ............................. 117 Connecting a DSL/Cable Modem ........ 119
T able of Contents v T able of Contents Connecting Through a Router ............ 120 USB Device Connection...................... 121 Digital Still Camera ........... ............................... 121 Other USB Devices ............ ............................... 122 Connecting an HP Personal Media Drive .................. 123 Installing an HP Personal Media Drive ................ 124 Disconnecting an HP Personal Media Drive ......... 125 Initial Configuration ............. 127 Starting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First Time .................... 128 Installing the Keyboard Batteries (Initial) .............. 128 Initial Startup ................. .................... .............. 1 29 Syncing the Keyboard ....... ............................... 130 Windows W elcome ........................... 131 Media Center First Run ...................... 132 Required Setup ................. ............................... 132 Optional Setup ................. ............................... 133 If Your Connections Donât Work ........................ 1 35 Adjusting the Front Panel Display Brightness ........ 135 Configuring Audio ............................ 136 Connecting Headphones ...... ............................ 136 Connecting a Microphone .... ............................ 136 Adjusting the Volume......... ............................... 138 Configuring Audio Output .. ............................... 139 Configuring Video ............................ 141 Configuring Video Output .. ............................... 141 Dual screen ...................... ............................... 142 Adjusting the Desktop Displa y ........................... 144 Adjusting the Display in Me dia Center................ 1 45 DVD Playback ..................... ............................ 148 Adjusting the Display from the Desktop ............... 149 HDTV Overscan Configuratio n ........................... 150 Finding ATSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels ..................... ................... ........... 151 Tuning the Desktop Display . ................... ........... 151 Configuring the System ..................... 154 Configuring the Keyboard Bu ttons ...................... 154 Registering with HP ......... ................... .............. 155 Setting Up Virus Protection .................. .............. 155 Transferring Information from Your Old PC to Your HP Digital Entertainment Center ............. 155 Installing Software ........... ................... .............. 156 Utility Programs............... ................... .............. 156 T r oubleshooting .................... 159 Problems and Solutions ..................... 160 Audio ................. ............................................ 160 Video ................. ............................................ 162 System .............................. ................... ........... 164 Getting Help ...................................... 170 Help and Support Center .... ................... ........... 170 HP Support ..................... ................... .............. 170 Warranty and Support Guid e ............................ 171 Updates from HP ................ ................... ........... 173 Microsoft Web Site ............ ................... ........... 173 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive .................... 175 Important Information About Recorded TV Programs ...... ................... ........... 175 Procedure ............................................ ........... 175 Index ................................... 179
vi HP Digital Entertainment Center
Before Y ou Begin Before Y ou Begin 1 Before Y ou Begin We l c o m e Thank you for purchasing the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center puts you in control of your complete home entertainment experience. Enjoy your TV , movies, music, photos, and home videos with one simple interface. Pause and replay live TV , and record your favorite TV shows. Use a television program guide without a monthly fee. Capture, personalize, and create DVDs of your home movies, and back up your photos, music, or favorite TV programs onto DVD. Use other entertainment equipment â like a TV , A V receiver , satellite receiver , an d digital camera â with the HP Digital Entertainment Center to create an integrated system. Access all of your TV programs, videos, pictures, music CDs, and DVDs using Microsoft ® Media Center software and the remote control. This Userâ s Guide helps you to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center to use with your audio/video system. The HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âFunctional Over viewâ on page 3 âKeyboardâ on page 10 âRemote Controlâ on page 14
2 HP Digital Entertainment Center Benefits and Features Benefits â Complete home digital en tertainment solution for your living room. â W atch, pause, and replay live TV on one channel while recording another (select models only). â Schedule future recordings with the complimentar y TV programming guide (no charge â separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). â Burn a DVD of your favorite TV shows or home videos. â Play DVDs in 7.1 surround sound (surround sound system is required and sold separately). â Burn music audio CDs (for lawful use only). â Store audio CDs in an easy-to-use music jukebox. â Listen to your collection of MP3 and AAC music. â Burn picture slide shows to CD or DVD. â View and edit your favorite digital photos. â Store your digital content on the HP Personal Media Drive. â Download movies on demand (fees may apply â separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). â Instant-message friends (separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). Pr oduct features â Sophisticated, sleek, stackable case fits into your A V cabinet â Built-in standard-definition TV tuner , NTSC (Dual tuners for select models only) â Built-in high-definition A TSC HDTV tuner (select models only) â Personal video recorder (PVR) with a complimentar y TV programming guide (no charge) â Built-in FM radio tuner â HP Personal Media Drive â Front panel media info display â CD/DVD double-layer , multiformat player/recorder â 9-in-1 media card reader â Rear and front A V connectors: â Digital Audio Out: Opti cal and coaxial S/PDIF 5.1 surround â Analog Audio Out: Up to 7.1 channels â Video Out: DVI, VGA, S-video, component, composite video â LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 â Integrated 802.11 b/g wireless â Front A V , USB, and FireWire ® (IEEE 1394) connectors for video capture â Full function remote control â Lap-sized, compact wireless keyboard with integrated trackball mouse
Before Y ou Begin 3 Before Y ou Begin Functional Over view Fr ont Panel The following illustration shows a typical HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel. Y our model might not have all features. Front panel Item Function Comments On/Standby (power) button and LED Push to turn on. Push for standby . Press and hold button 4 seconds to turn off. Solid blue: On Solid amber: Standby CD/DVD player/recorder Progressive scan DVD player plus double-layer DVD RW/DVD-R recorder CD/DVD, multiformat Push the Eject button to open. Push the tray or Eject button to close. T ranspor t control buttons Replay , Play , Pause, Stop, Skip, Eject Experience mode status indicators White indicates DVD, TV , radio, music, pictures, videos, activities in Media Center Personal Media Drive Bay Removable HP Personal Media Drive behind top right door , for additional storage for recorded TV shows and digital content HP Digital Entertainment Center A V inputs USB and card readers CD/DVD HP Persona l Me di a Dr i ve Bay Media info display
4 HP Digital Entertainment Center 9-in-1 memor y card readers SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive, MS/MS-Pro USB 2.0 (2) Card readers behind lower right door LED: Green (with media inserted) Off (no media inserted) See âMemor y Card Readerâ on page 5. Media info display Front st atus panel for all media information. Front-panel text content displayed from Media Center Behind left door A V connectivity for capturing analog and digital video from camcorders Front A V inputs â see below Keyboard connect switch for wireless keyboard synchronization Blinking green LED indicates keyboard activity . Special blink status indicates sync with keyboard. S-video In Y/C video, analog 4-pin Video In Composite video RCA jack Audio In White: Left Red: Right, RCA jacks 1394 DV In FireWire (IEEE 1394), 4-pin input-output for digital video Headphone Out 1/4 inch jack Microphone In 1/8 inch mini-jack Item Function Comments HP Digital Entertainment Center E ED 2 .0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SP EED SB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC I N HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT S-VIDEO FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R CON FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO D L R 1 AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MI C HEADPHONES CONNECT I O DV IN R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES DV IN R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES
Before Y ou Begin 5 Before Y ou Begin Memor y Card Reader The HP Digital Entertainment Center 9-in-1 card readers are on the front panel, located behind a door for quick transfer of digital photos an d other digital content. Four horizontal card slots accept memor y cards. An in-use light-emitting diode (LED) indicates card reader activity when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is reading or writing data. W ait until the LED stops blinking before removing media. Digital cameras and other digital devices use memor y cards, or media, to store digital picture files. T wo USB 2.0 connectors are also included. Y our model might not have all features. Memory card readers w Removing media when the in-use light is blinking may cause damage. On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 Item Name Slot Supports Insert media SmartMedia/xD Upper-left SmartMedia (SM) memor y card/ xD media Facing up MMC/SD Upper-right MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) memor y card Facing up CompactFlash I/II Microdrive Lower-left CompactFlash T ype I, II media Microdrive disk drive Receptacle edge (holes) MS/MS-Pro Lower-right Memory Stick (MS) Memor y Stick (MS-Pro) Facing up SmartMedia / xD Comp actFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO
6 HP Digital Entertainment Center Back Panel The following illustration shows the HP Di gital Entertainment Center back panel. (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Supported format Audio In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog stereo Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Surround Back RCA jacks Brown: Left Beige: Right Analog: 7.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Surround RCA jacks Blue: Left Grey: Right Analog: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1, 4.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Center/Subwoofer RCA jacks Green: center Purple: subwoofer Analog: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Front RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog stereo: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1, 4.1, 2.1, 2.0 Digital Audio Out Coaxial Orange S/PDIF 5.1 only DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz AUDIO IN R L SURROUND BACK R L SURROUND R L CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R L COAXIAL
Before Y ou Begin 7 Before Y ou Begin Digital Audio Out Optical Gray S/PDIF 5.1 only Vid eo Ou t (Composite) RCA jack Y ellow Analog: Interlaced scan S-video Out Y/C video 4-pin Black Analog: Interlaced scan Up to 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz Component Video Out (Not all modes support DVD playback due to content protection.) 3 RCA jacks Green: Y Blue: Pb Red: Pr Analog: Interlaced or progressive scan interlaced displays up to 1080i, Plus 480p, 720p VGA Out 15-pin D-sub Blue Analog: Up to 2048 x 1536 with panning depending on display size Digital Video Out (DVI) DVI-I 29-pin D-sub digital/ analog White Digital: Up to 1600 x 1200 Up to 2048 x 1536 with panning depending on display size USB 2.0 (high speed) 4 ports Silver USB 2.0 1394 (for digital video or other device) 6-pin DV input/ output Silver FireWire (IEEE 1394) Ethernet 10/100/1000 RJ-45 N/A 10/100/1000 Item Connector T ype Color Suppor ted format DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y Pb Pr COMPONENT OUT VGA DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI HI SPEED USB 2.0 1394 10/100/1000 ETHERNET
8 HP Digital Entertainment Center Wireless LAN Removable antenna Gold 802.11 b/g LEDs (2) Activity: Blinks when transmits/ receives data Link: Solid green when wireless LAN is enabled and connected. Blinks when wireless LAN is scanning. Wireless LAN 802.11b/g Audio TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog Video (Composite) TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz S-video TV Source 1 In Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz Cable/Antenna In Coaxial Silver RF NTSC with internal splitter to dual-tuners FM Antenna In 75 Ohm Coaxial Silver FM radio, RF Audio TV Source 2 In (Select models only) RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog S-video TV Source 2 In (Select models only) Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz HDTV/SDTV Ant. In (Select models only) Coaxial Silver RF A TSC (from UHF and VHF antenna) Infrared T ransmitter Out (2 outputs) 1/8 inch mini-jack Silver Remote infrared (IR Blaster) AC In AC 110â240V 50â60 Hz Black Power Item Connector T ype Color Supported format WIRELESS LAN REMOV ABLE ANTENNA 802.11 b/g ACTIVITY LINK AUDIO R L S-VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER N FM ANTENNA IN 75 ⦠CO AXIAL A L E R AUDIO R L S-VIDEO HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 AC IN 110-240V 50-60Hz
Before Y ou Begin 9 Before Y ou Begin Cleaning the HP Digital Enter tainment Center The HP Digital Entertainment Center is a high-quality device that requires special care when cleaning. T o clean the HP Digital Entertainment Center , follow these steps: 1 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Center and connected equipment. 2 Unplug the HP Digital Entertainment Center from the wall outlet before cleaning. 3 Use a soft dr y cloth for cleaning. 4 Plug in the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 T urn on connected equipment and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Shipping the HP Digital Enter tainment Center Keep the original packing box in a storage area. Y ou may need it later if you move or ship your HP Digital Entertainment Center . w Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners to clean your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not use benzene, thinner , ammonia, or any other volatile substances. These chemicals may damage your unit.
10 HP Digital Entertainment Center Keyboard The following illustration shows the HP Digi tal Entertainment Center wireless keyboard. The following table shows the wireless keyboard features and function keys from left to right. Icon Item Description On/Standby T urns HP Digital Enter tainment Center on, when in standby . Places HP Digital Entertainment Center in standby . Indicator light Amber: Caps Lock on. Green: Key or mouse button activity . Mouse button left, right Left-click, right-click. Back Displays previously viewed Media Center or browser page. For ward Displays next viewed Media Center or browser page. Internet Opens your Internet browser . E-mail Opens an Internet e-mail page or your e-mail software. T rackBall Left, right mouse button Back Forward Internet E-mail
Before Y ou Begin 11 Before Y ou Begin Messenger Opens your instant messaging program. Minimize Minimizes the Media Center application. Maximize Maximizes the Media Center application. Media Center Starts Media Center . Previous Selects previous media track. Play Plays media. Pause Pauses media. Next Selects next media track. V ol â Decreases speaker volume. V ol Increases speaker volume. Mute T urns speaker sound on and off. T rackball Moves cursor on screen. Icon Item Description Messenger Minimize Maximize Center Media Previous Play Pause Next Vol Vol Mute
12 HP Digital Entertainment Center Wireless Keyboard Operation Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center includes a wireless keyboard that uses a built-in receiver/transmitter instead of a connector cable to communicate. The Keyboard Connect button, behind the lower-left door of the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel, has an LED that indicates receiver activity . Approximate range is 12 feet (3.66 meters). n The Internet, E-mail, and Messenger buttons can be reconfigured to open a W eb site or software program. See âConfiguring the Keyboard Buttonsâ on page 154. Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . n Use only alkaline batteries in the keyboard. On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUD IO DV IN L R 1 394 MIC IN HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT
Before Y ou Begin 13 Before Y ou Begin Replacing the Keyboard Batteries Keep spare batteries on hand. Batter y life will var y with the use of the system. 1 Slide the batter y cover off the back of the keyboard. 2 Insert four AA batteries (alkaline). Make sure the batter y positive and negative ends are inserted correctly! 3 Replace the batter y cover . 4 Make sure the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on. 5 Te s t t h e k e y b o a r d . â The keyboard is set to connect to the HP Digital Entertainment Center automatically . 6 If the keyboard does not operate: a Check the batter y orientation. b Sync the keyboard. See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. If you have no batteries and must use a keyboard, attach a USB keyboard to the back or front panel. Y ou can also use the remote control for many functions as a temporar y substitute.
14 HP Digital Entertainment Center Remote Contr ol Remote Contr ol Buttons AS t a n d b y Puts the HP Digital Entertainment Center into and out of a power- reduced standby state. It does not turn the HP Digital Entertainment Center off. BD V D Menu Opens Play DVD window in Media Center or opens the main menu of a DVD movie, if available. CM u s i c Starts My Music. DR a d i o Star ts FM Radio. ER e c o r d Records selected television program and stores it on the hard disk drive. FR e w (Rewind) Moves the media backward (press button for three speeds). GR e p l a y Rewinds live or recorded TV back 8 seconds, or to beginning of music track or DVD chapter . HP a u s e Pauses audio and video tracks and live or recorded TV programs. JB a c k Returns to the previous window within Media Center . KA r r o w s Buttons move the cursor to navigate within all Media Center windows. They also move for ward and backward through slide- show images. DVD MENU MUSIC RADIO RECORD REW REPLA Y P AUSE LM e d i a Center Opens Media Center to the main menu. MV o l u m e Increases ( ) and decreases (â) sound. NL i v e T V Is a shortcut to view live TV . It also moves to the current point in a live TV program after pausing live TV . OG u i d e Opens the T elevision Program Guide to display available TV channels and programs to watch and record. PC l e a r Deletes the selection and works as the Backspace key does on a keyboard. QT V Starts My TV . RP i c t u r e s Star ts My Pictures. SV i d e o s Starts My Videos. TP l a y Plays the selected media. US t o p Stops the selected media. TV PICTURES VIDEOS PLA Y STOP (Features and location may vary . Refer to the specific documentation for other remote contr ols.)
Before Y ou Begin 15 Before Y ou Begin SKIP FWD STOP PLA Y MUSIC PICTURES VIDEOS RADIO TV DVD MENU P AUSE REPLA Y REW RECORD A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF VF w d (Fast-for ward) Moves media for ward (press button for three speeds). WS k i p Moves media for ward â for example, 30 seconds in videos and live TV , one music track, or one DVD chapter . XM o r e ( i ) Displays available information about a selected media file and displays more information and options. YO K Selects the desired action or window option. It acts as the Enter key . ZC H / P G Up ( ) and down (â) change the TV channel or move pages up and down, depending on available options. AA Mute T urns sound off. The word Mute is displayed on the Media Center screen when Mute is turned on. AB Re c o r d ed TV Opens the Recorded TV window . AC 0 to 9, #, * Numeric keypad buttons to change channels or enter text into the Media Center search or text box. AD Enter Selects the desired action or window option. In full-screen mode, press Enter to return to the last channel you were watching. AE Print Prints selected content on the screen. AF LED Activity indicator lights on pressing a button. FWD SKIP OK
16 HP Digital Entertainment Center Remote Contr ol Operation Use the remote control to open the Media Center program; view TV , record TV programs, play previously recorded TV programs, and play music, movies, or video. See âUsing the Remote Controlâ in the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide for detailed instructions on using the features of the remote control. T o use the remote control, just point it at the HP Digital Entertainment Center and press a button. Use the remote control at a maximum distance of 26 feet (8 meters) from the remote sensor and at a maximum of 45 degrees (90 degrees total) from the center of the remote sensor . The remote control will not op erate until the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on and fully booted up. Installing the Remote Contr ol Batteries 1 Slide the batter y cover off the back of the remote control. 2 Insert the two AA alkaline batteries (provided). Make sure the batter y positive and negative ends are inserted correctly! 3 Replace the batter y cover . 4 T est the remote control by pressing any key . The indicator light should blink. n Media Center must be in full-screen mode (or have focus) for consistent remote control operation. Performance may var y . On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center z545 90 Ë ~2 6 feet LED Indicator Light Remote operation n Use only alkaline batteries in the remote. SKIP FWD STOP PLAY MUSIC PICTURESVIDEOS RADIO TV DVD MENU PAUSE REPLAY REW RECORD OK
Safety Information Safety Information 17 Safety Information Read Instructions before installing or operating your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Follow the instructions provided. Heed all safety warnings and notes. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for additional safety information. AC Power Safety W arnings Use the right AC source. The power supply is preset for the countr y/region in which you purchased the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you move to another countr y/region, please make sure you check its voltage requirements before plugging your HP Digital Entertainment Center into an AC power outlet. A power cord is included with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . If another cord is used, use only a power source and connection appropriate for this HP Digital Entertainment Center . Install the system near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your HP Digital Entertainment Centerâ s main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety , the power cord provided with your system has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. T o reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your system into the AC outlet before connecting it to the DSL/telephone line. Also, disconnect the DSL/telephone line before unplugging your system from the AC power outlet. This product has not been ev aluated for connection to an âITâ power system (an AC di stribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC 60950). Ground your system. T o reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, do not disable the power cord grounding feature. The grounding plug is an important safety feature. Connect the equipment to a grounded (earthed) power outlet. For your safety , be sure that the grounded power outlet into which you plug the power cord is easily accessible to the operator and is located as close to the equipment as possible. w Please read this important safety information. Chapter Contents: âAC Power Safety W arningsâ on page 17 w â Do not open top cover . â Risk of electric shock. â No user-serviceable par ts inside top cover .
18 HP Digital Entertainment Center AC Power Safety W arnings (continued) Never pull on the cord. Disconnect the HP Digital Entertainment Center by grasping the plug fir mly and pulling it from the power outlet. Never disconnect the HP Digital Entertainment Center by pulling the cord. Install your HP Digital Entertai nment Center near an outlet that you can easily reach. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not walk on the cord. Use surge protection. T o protect your HP Digital Entertainment Center and other equipment, connect all power cords for your system and its peripheral devices (such as a printer or scanner) to a surge protection device such as a power strip with surge protection or Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). Not all power strips provide surge protection; the power strips must be specifically labeled as having this ability . Use a power strip whose manufacturer offers a damage replacement policy so you can replace your equipment if surge protection fails. Use the right power source. Use only a power source and connection appropriate for this HP Digital Entertainment Center , as indicated on the label/back plate of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Be sure the total ampere rating of the products connected to the outlet does not exceed the current rating of the electrical outlet, and the total ampere rating of the products connected to the cord does not exceed the rating of the cord. Look on the power label to determine the ampere rating (AMPS or A) for each device. Outdoor antenna grounding â If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection agains t voltage surges and static buildup charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFP A 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for additional safety information. Lightning â For added protection of any HP product during a lightning storm, or wh en it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges. Power lines â An outside antenna should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circui ts, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.
Installation Overview Installation Over view 19 Installation Over view This chapter provides information on your system and describes how to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to your audio/video (A V) equipment in detail. Y ou may find connection details that wonât be in the basic Start Here booklet. The S tart Here booklet works with this Userâ s Guide . T ake a few minutes to look at the Start Here booklet before you read this chapter . Y ou may fi nd the infor mation you need there. The HP Digital Entertainment Center is ver y versatile and works with a wide variety of basic, typical, and advanced multimedia systems. The installation process is divided into four major areas: Audio, Video, TV Source In, Network. The setup can take some time, depending on your system, and may require additional cables. Chapter Contents: âSystem Audio/Video Connectionsâ on page 20 âBasic Setupâ on page 27 âInventor yâ on page 29 w Read the important safety information before you install the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
20 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Audio/V ideo Connections System Integration The HP Digital Entertainment Center incorporates many functions into one unit: â An Internet connection through a wireless or wired network, using an Internet ser vice provider (sold separately), allows the HP Digital Entertainment Center to access the T elevision Program Guide and Internet content sources. â A cable connection from a set-top box or antenna hookup (sold separately) allows the TV tuner inside the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the TV channels. â An infrared transmitter (IR blaster) connection to a set-top box from the HP Digital Enter tainment Center allows the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the set-top box channels from the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control. â Audio outputs from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV speakers or A V receiver allow up to 7.1 surround sound. â Vid eo outputs from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV or A V receiver allow you to watch TV and to view the HP Digital Entertainment Center display . â An FM radio antenna connection allows the FM tuner inside the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the FM radio channels. â The wireless keyboard with trackball or remote control allows you to operate the HP Digital Entertainment Center from the comfor t of your couch. How you connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center into your system depends on how you want to use it. The HP Digital Entertainment Center functions as a media source, with DVD and personal video player/recorders built in. Y our A V receiver or TV functions as your audio/ video output switch. T o watch and record TV , video, and audio, you must first connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center inputs to your video, audio, and network sources. â T o play back audio/video, you must connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center outputs to your sound system and TV/display . â T o record audio/video, you must connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center inputs to your video source, such as a cable set-top box, satellite receiver , or antenna. â T o update the T elevision Program Guide and use the Internet, you must also connect to a home network or DSL/cable modem. If your HP Digital Entertainment Center has the dual-tuner option, each tuner must be connected to the same TV source. Y ou can connect two cable set-top boxes, or two, satellite receivers, or an antenna with cable splitter . The T elevision Program Guide only suppor ts one TV ser vice provider channel lineup. Audio and video output cabl es from the HP Digital Entertainment Center can be: â Routed through an A V receiver to provide an audio and video signal to your TV . Or â Routed directly to your TV . Imagine the flow of your televi sion signal into and out of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o watch and record TV , your TV signal (for example, from a satellite) must flow into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Then, for you to watch live or recorded TV , the HP Digital Enter tainment Center must send the recorded TV shows out to your TV .
Installation Over view 21 Installation Overview The following illustration shows the audio and video signal routed from the satellite or cable receiver source to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , then through an A V receiver to your TV : Audio/Video flow Set-top-box Infrared T ransmitter Download TV Program Guide Audio TV Source Data Remote Control Keyboard Internet AV In AV Receiver TV or Monitor Cable In HP Digital Entertainment Center AV Out DSL/Cable Modem or Wireless Router Cable Box or Satellite Receiver TV Source In Infrared T ransmitter AV Video Network Data Digital Video Camcorder HP Digital Entertainment Center VHF Antenna UHF Antenna HDTV (A TSC) and/or NTSC Over-the-air Digital Signal
22 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Diagram Back Panel DIGITA L VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI S PEED US B 2.0 ETHE RNET 13 94 AUDIO IN R L AUDI O 7.1 PRE -OUT SURR OUND B ACK SURR OUND CE NTER SUB WOOFER FR ONT R R R L L L VID EO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb V GA Pr INFRARED TRANSMI TTER OUT 1 2 TV SOU RCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LA N 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE AN TENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4 /A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDE O AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Cable or Satellite Set-top box 2 VGA MONITOR DVI D SL/ Cable Mo dem Note: Connect Set-top box 2 only (optional) OUT W all Router/ Firewall/ Switch iPod Surge Protector Line Conditioner WiFi Antenna AC Wall Outlet Internet Digital Camera Printer Ext. HDD Cable or Satellite Set-top box 1 Surround Left Center Surround Right Front Left Front Right Surround Back Right Speakers S-video Video Com ponent S-video Composite Coaxial S-video Composite Surround Back Left Subwoofer AV RECEIVER IN TV IN S-Video Video Pr Pb Y Audio In 7.1 Multichannel Surr. Back Surround Center Sub Front Digital Optical Coaxial CD or T ape Player Choose one Choose one Choose one Cable From Wall Coaxial Note: 5.1 systems do not include âSurr . Backâ connections. OUT FM Antenna Choose one Digital Video Camcorder OUT Roof Antenna UHF Antenna VHF Antenna HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER (Configurations may vary .)
Installation Over view 23 Installation Overview Fr ont Panel (Configurations may vary .) The following illustration shows a typical HP Digital Entertainment Center system front panel installation: On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlas h I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES FRONT INPUT S-V IDEO V IDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 13 94 MIC IN HEADPHONES Analog Video Camera Digital Video Camera Digital Camera USB 2.0 (x2) Choose one S-video Video (Composite) 1 394 Card Readers: SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive MS/MS Pro Power On CD/DVD Player/Recorder Media Info Display HP Personal Media Drive
24 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installation Guidelines T o enhance the per formance and extend the life of your HP Digital Entertainment Center: â Keep your HP Digital Entertainment Center in a well-ventilated area, away from excessive light, heat, or moisture. â Keep ventilation slots clear of obstructions such as equipment or papers. The HP Digital Entertainment Center automatically turns off if it gets too hot. â This product is heavy . Exercise caution when lifting or moving. â Place your HP Digital Entertainment Center on a stable, supported sur face. Do not drop or place it on an unstable surface. â Put your HP Digital Entertainment Center into Standby when not in use. In Standby , the On/ Standby button is lit amber . Preset recordings only start when the HP Digital Enter tainment Center is on or in Standby . â Adjust only those controls that are described in the operating instructions. â Do not open your HP Digital Entertainment Center cabinet or attempt to ser vice this product yourself. If your HP Digital Entertainment Center is not operating properly or has been dropped or damaged, contact your HP authorized dealer , reseller , or ser vice provider . Choosing an HP Digital Entertainment Center setup location If you intend to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV , a set-to p box, or a surround sound system, HP recommends that you choose a clear working area with easy access to the connectors of these devices. If your TV is wall-mounted, make sure that you have access to the rear ports on the TV before attempting to connect it to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . w An open-back is required for adequate cooling when installing your HP Digital Entertainment Center in an A V cabinet. 17 in 432 mm On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center 4.5 in 114.3 mm 16.25 in 412.75 mm w Leave slots and openings in the HP Digital Entertainment Center cabinet open for ventilation. These openings must not be blocked or covered. Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings.
Installation Over view 25 Installation Overview Placement and V entilation Requirements Cabinet Fr ont IMPORT ANT : Use an open cabinet or shelves for best operation of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not cover vents on top, back and sides of the unit. If you choose to use a cabine t with front doors, you must leave the doors open when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on. . Open cabinet (Actual home setup may vary .) w Failure to follow these ventilation requirements could cause the HP Digital Entertainment Center to malfunction. H P D ig ita l E n te r ta i n m e n t C e n t e r
26 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cabinet Back The back of the A V cabinet should be open for best operation. If the A V cabinet has a back, the back must have a hole behind the HP Digital Entertainment Center , for air circulation, with a minimum open area of 19 inches (48.3 cm) wide by 6.5 inches (16.5 cm) high. See the following illustration. Wa l l C l e a r a n c e The HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel must be at least 4 inches (10.2 cm) from the wall. Cabinet 6.5" H minimum Back View HP Digital Entertainment Center 1" minimum 1" minimum 2" minimum 19" W minimum Note: These clearances are required for proper ventilation. Cabinet 4" minimum Side View Back of cabinet HP Digital Entertainment Center W all
Installation Over view 27 Installation Overview Basic Setup Follow the steps in the Start Here booklet to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Most of the hardware devices such as the monitor and printer can be connected at the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Some peripheral devices, such as a digital video camera, can be plugged into the connectors on the back panel or the front panel (behind lower doors) of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Setting Up the HP Digital Enter tainment Center The basic steps to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center are in the Start Here booklet as follows. Y our system may be different. See the referenced sections for detailed information on each step. Before you begin: â Read âSafety Informationâ on page 17. â Read âInstallation Guidelinesâ on page 24. â Refer to the Start Here booklet as a guide to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Required steps 1 Unpack the box contents. a T ake inventor y . See âInventor yâ on page 29. Identify the items included with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . b Identify equipment you will need that is not supplied. c Place the HP Digital Entertainment Center where you can easily reach the back panel. 2 Determine how you will connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your system. 3 Connect the audio cables. See âT ypical Audio Connectionâ on page 38. a Audio In (optional) b Audio Out (to TV , A V receiver , speakers) c Digital Audio Out 4 Connect the V ideo Out to the TV or display . See âT ypical Video Out Connectionsâ on page 63. w Read the important safety information before you install the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
28 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5 Connect the TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In cables. See âT ypical TV Source Connectionsâ on page 78. a Connect the Cable/Antenna In. b Connect the Source 1 In audio/video cables to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 1. c Connect the Source 2 In audio/video cables to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 2 (select models only). d Connect the Infrared T ransmitter 1 to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 1. e Connect the Infrared T ransmitter 2 to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 2 (select models only). f Connect the HDTV Antenna In. 6 Connect the FM radio an tenna. See âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56. 7 Connect the Internet network cables. See âT ypical Network Connectionsâ on page 116. a DSL/cable modem to Internet (Ethernet) b Wir el ess an te nn a 8 Pull the tab on the keyboard to activate the batteries. See âInstalling the Keyboard Batteries (Initial)â on page 128. 9 Insert the remote control batteries. See âInstalling the Remote Control Batteriesâ on page 16. 10 Place the HP Digital Enter tainment Center on a flat, stable surface with the following clearances: â T op: 2 inches (5.08 cm) â Side: 1 inch (2.54 cm) â Back: Open cabinet See âSafety Informationâ on page 17. 11 T ur n on all equipment, and then turn on the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . See âStarting the HP Digital Entertainment Center for the First Timeâ on page 128. 12 Complete the initial star tup and registration. See âWindows W elcomeâ on page 131. a Follow the onscreen instructions. b Set up Media Center . 13 Optional step (Recommended after basic setup) Connect any additional rear panel devices. a FireWire (IEEE 1394) device or digital video camera. See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. b USB devices, such as printers or scanners (up to 4). See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. 14 Optional step (Recommended after basic setup) Connect front panel devices. a FireWire (IEEE 1394) device or digital video camera. See âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101. b USB devices, such as printers or scanners (up to 2). See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. c VCR or analog video camera. See âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101. d Insert the removable hard disk drive (optional). See âConnecting an HP Personal Media Driveâ on page 123. Begin using your system. See the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide .
Installation Over view 29 Installation Overview Inventor y The following items are supplied with the HP Digital Entertainment Center: Name Picture Description HP Digital Entertainment Center unit See âFunctional Over viewâ on page 3. Keyboard See âKeyboardâ on page 10. Remote control See âRemote Controlâ on page 14. Cables See âCables Includedâ on page 30. FM antenna Antenna for FM radio, 75-ohm coaxial. See âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56. Wi-Fi antenna Antenna for Wireless LAN 802.11 b/g, removable. See âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117. Documentation Printed documentation is included. DVD recover y discs (2) Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide. Batteries: AA (6) 2 for remote (in package), 4 for keyboard (inside keyboard). HP Digital Entertainment Center H P H o m e T h e a te r P C S y ste m R e c o v e ry W i n d o w s ® X P M e d i a C e n te r E d i t i o n 2 0 0 4 S u p p o rt fo r M ic ro so ft p ro d u ct s is p r o v ide d b y H P . Fo r distribu tio n o nly w ith a n ew PC . © 2 0 03 - 2004 Hewle tt- P a ckard De velopme nt Compa ny, L.P. Portion s ©2 0 0 3. M i cr osoft Co rporatio n. All ri ghts r eserved. Prod uc t of X X XXXX. T h is C D c a n O N LY b e u se d w it h a n H P H o m e T h e a te r P C . R e fe r to th e p r in te d in str u ct io n s p r o v id e d w ith y o u r R e co ve ry C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 B a sic S e tu p Connect your system to the back panel. Y our connector locations and system components may var y . HP Digital Entertainment Center Start Here Softw are G uide HP Digital Enter tainment Center S oftw a re G u id e HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Home Theater PC System Recovery W in d o w s ® X P M e d ia C e n te r E d itio n 2 0 0 4 S u p p o r t fo r M ic ro s o ft p r o d u c ts is p r o v id e d b y H P . For distribution only w ith a new PC. © 2 0 0 3 -2 0 0 4 H e w le tt- P a ck a rd D e v e lo p m e n t C o m p a n y, L .P . P o rtio ns © 2 0 0 3 . M ic ro so ft C o rp o ra tio n . A ll rig hts re se r v e d . P ro d u ct o f X X X X X X . D is c 1 T h is C D c a n O N L Y b e u s e d w ith a n H P H o m e T h e a t e r P C . R e f e r t o th e p rin te d in s tru c tio n s p ro v id e d w ith y o u r R e c o v e ry C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 HP Home Theater PC System Recovery W indows ® XP Media Center Edition 2004 S u p p o r t fo r M ic r o s o ft p r o d u c ts is p r o v i d e d b y H P . For distribution only with a new PC. © 2 0 0 3 -2 0 0 4 H e w le tt- P a c ka rd D e ve lo p m e n t C o m p a n y , L. P . P o rtio n s © 2 0 0 3 . M i cr o s o ft C o rp o ra tio n . A ll rig h ts r e s e rve d . P ro d u c t o f X X X X X X . Disc 1 T h is C D c a n O N L Y b e u s e d w ith a n H P H o m e T h e a te r P C . R e f e r to th e p r i n te d in s tr u c tio n s p r o v id e d w i th y o u r R e c o v e r y C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8
30 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cables Included Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center comes with the following cables. Additional cables are sold separately . See âOptional Cables Not Includedâ on page 31 for additional cables that you may need. Cable Name Description Stereo RCA, red and white ends. Used for Audio Out. DVI-D Digital video out. Connect to DVI-I or DVI-D input of the HDTV - capable TV or monitor . S-video Black. Used for Video Out. Coaxial digital audio S/PDIF . Used for Digital Audio Out. Infrared T ransmitter (2 with dual-tuner option) IR Blaster cable. Used for set-top boxes. Coaxial (2 with dual-tuner option) Used for TV source input from cable set-top boxes or antennas. Coaxial Splitter (dual-tuner option) Used with coaxial cable for VH F and UHF antenna combinations. AC Power Black 125V 10A. 2 Way Splitter
Installation Over view 31 Installation Overview Optional Cables Not Included Y ou might need the following extra cables (these items are sold separately). Cable Name Max quantity Description Stereo and Video (Composite) 4 RCA: Red, white, yellow ends. Used for TV Source In connector . Stereo 8 RCA: Red and white ends. Used for Audio In/Out connectors. Component video 1 RCA: Red, blue, and green ends. Used for progressive scan component video. S-video 4 Y/C, 4-pin. Plug cable into an S-video connector such as S-video Video Out or TV Source In connector . Video (Composite) 4 RCA: Y ellow end. Plug cable into an RCA connector such as composite Video Out or TV Source In connector . S-video to composite video adapter 1 Used with TV source input 2 composite video input. VGA 1 15-pin, D-sub Analog. Used for monitor or HDTV capable TV . Optical digital audio 1 S/PDIF . Used for Digital Audio Out. FireWire (IEEE 1394) digital video in/out 1 1 IEEE 1394 4-pin to 6-pin (back). IEEE 1394 4-pin to 4-pin (front). USB 6 USB 2.0. Used for peripheral device connectors. Ethernet RJ-45 1 Ethernet 10/100/1000. Used for broadband Internet connection. Coaxial Extra lengths Used for TV source input from cable set-top boxes or antennas.
32 HP Digital Entertainment Center Additional equipment Y ou must have the following items to set up and properly operate your HP Digital Entert ainment Center and system (these items are sold separately): â Audio system equipment such as: â A V receiver with speakers â Powered speakers â TV speakers â Monitor speakers â Video equipment such as: â Monitor â TV â Video projector â Video output from cable/satellite box or antenna â UHF/VHF antenna for HDTV A TSC â Broadband Internet equipment such as: â Cable/DSL modem (working connection required for Media Center features, such as downloading the T elevision Program Guide) â Wireless LAN 802.11 b/g network â Clean AC power (surge protector/line conditioner recommended) Additional equipment and cables are sold separately . Y ou may also need the following items (sold separately; available at electronics stor es) to fully set up your HP Digital Entertainment Center , depending on your system audio and video requirements: â Audio/Video/Network cables: See âOptional Cables Not Includedâ on page 31. â Audio Y adapter(s), mini-plug to 2 RCA-plugs (for powered speakers). Connecting cables Obser ve the following guidelines: â Do not plug in the HP Digital Entertainment Center until all connecting cables are installed. â T urn off power to all other equipment before connecting cables. â Connect cables firmly to avoid hum and noise. â Match the color codes, for instance: yellow â video, white â left, red â right.
Connecting Audio Connecting Audio 33 Connecting Audio The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different audio options, so und connections, and speaker configurations. This chapter describes the most typical, and some advanced, audio setup options for connecting Audio Out and Audio In. T o connect TV Source In audio and video, see âConnecting TV Source Inâ on page 71. Y our system may have different components. Speakers, A V receivers, and other equipment are sold separately . Refer to the product documentation for these products. Stereo HP Digital Entertainment Center On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âAudio Over viewâ on page 34 âT ypical Audio Connectionâ on page 38 âTV Audio Connectionâ on page 39 âA V Receiver Audio Connectionâ on page 40 âPowered Speaker Audio Connectionâ on page 48 âAudio In Connectionsâ on page 55 âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56
34 HP Digital Entertainment Center Audio Over view Audio Output Connectors Connector Name Color Description Cable Surround Back Brown: Left Beige: Right Rear speakers in a multichannel audio eight speaker system (7.1). Surround Blue: Left Gray: Right Side speakers in a multichannel audio six or eight speaker system (4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Center Subwoofer Green: Center Purple: Subwoofer Center speaker and subwoofer in a multichannel audio system (5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Front White: Left Red: Right Stereo speakers or front speakers in a multichannel audio system (2.0, 2.1, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Coaxial Digital Audio Out Orange Coaxial S/PDIF 5.1 only . See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. Optical Digital Audio Out Gray Optical S/PDIF 5.1 only . See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Audio Out Audio Out HDTV / SDT V ANT . I N A TSC TUNER SURROUND BACK R L SURROUND R L CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R L DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL
Connecting Audio 35 Connecting Audio Sound Connector Jacks The audio connectors are RCA-type jacks that connect from the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV , powered speakers, or an A V receiver . The HP Digital Entertainment Center has separate Audio In connections (analog). The HP Digital Entertainment Center has two Digital Audio Out connections (S/PDIF) that are coaxial and optical. Use analog Audio 7. 1 Pre-out or Digital Audio Out connectors, but not both. Use only one Digital Audio Out connector at a time. The HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter does not have Digital Audio In connections. Speaker T ypes A stereo speaker set is a left-right, two-channel speaker system (sold separately). A multichannel audio speaker system has a subwoofer , left-right front, and left-right surround channels. The system may also include a left-right surround back channel and a center speaker . Surround back speakers are included in more advanced 7.1 systems. A subwoofer provides enhanced bass sounds. The â.1â indicates a subwoofer . For example, 7.1 channels refer to an eight-speaker mode and uses two front speakers (left-right), tw o side speakers (left-right), two rear speakers (left-right), a center speaker , and a subwoofer . See âSpeaker Configurationsâ on page 36 for more information on speaker arrangements. Audio amplifiers The HP Digital Entertainment Center does not supply an amplified audio signal. Y ou can connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to: â Passive speakers connected through a home audio system. A home audio system does not require active speakers because the receiver provides amplification. â Active (powered) speakers directly . An active speaker system must have its own power cord. n If your audio equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the audio equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video.
36 HP Digital Entertainment Center Speaker Configurations Y ou can set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the following supported audio configurations: Speaker system Home audio system description Recommended arrangement See: 2 (stereo) T wo speakers: Left speaker , right speaker â2.0 Home Stereo Installationâ on page 41 Or â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 2.1 T wo speakers: Left speaker , right speaker One subwoofer â2.1 Home Stereo Installationâ on page 42 Or â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 4.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One subwoofer â4.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 43 Or â4.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 50 5.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One center speaker One subwoofer â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Or â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 TV Display Front right speaker Front left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Front right speaker Front left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker
Connecting Audio 37 Connecting Audio 6.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One rear surround back speaker One center speaker One subwoofer If your 6.1 A V receiver has only 5.1 (6) inputs, see the following: â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Or â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 7.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker T wo rear speakers: surround back left speaker , surround back right speaker One center speaker One subwoofer â7.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 45 Or â7.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 52 If your 7.1 A V receiver has only five inputs, see â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Digital audio 5.1 Digital speakers or digital input connector on the audio system âDigital Home Theater Audioâ on page 46 Or âDigital Powered Speakersâ on page 53 Speaker system Home audio system description Recommended arrangement See: Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker Surround back speaker TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker Surround back left speaker TV Display TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker
38 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical Audio Connection Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. Y ou can set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the following supported audio configurations: Audio system Description See: TV TV , monitor or display direct audio connection with two speakers âTV Audio Connectionâ on page 39 A V receiver Home stereo or home theater audio system with A V receiver and passive speakers âA V Receiver Audio Connectionâ on page 40 Powered speakers Audio system with active speakers âPowered Speaker Audio Connectionâ on page 48 FM FM T uner In âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56 Headphones Speakers are muted on headphone connection âConnecting Headphonesâ on page 136 Then see: âAudio In Connectionsâ on page 55 âConnecting Video Outâ on page 57 âConfiguring Audioâ on page 136
Connecting Audio 39 Connecting Audio TV Audio Connection Y ou can connect your TV , monitor , or display audio directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center for two-speaker sound. If your TV has multiple inputs, you can use your TV as a switch for audio and video. Connecting TV Audio T o connect a TV , monitor , or display audio directly: â Connect an RCA stereo cable (White: Left; Red: Right) from the HP Di gital Enter tainment Center back panel Audio Out connector to a TV Audio In connector . Refer to the Start Here booklet that came with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . For additional information on connecting the speakers, refer to the documentation that came with your speakers and A V receiver . The following diagram shows a basic TV audio installation: Basic TV audio setup (2.0) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OU T SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VID EO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV AUDIO IN ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
40 HP Digital Entertainment Center A V Receiver Audio Connection Y ou can connect your HP Digital Enter tainment Center to your home stereo or home theater multichannel A V receivers or audio amplifiers using your existing speakers. A V Receiver Equipment Over view Y ou can connect audio and video from the HP Digital Entertainment Center , through an A V receiver , to the TV input. Use this method to connect A V receivers or audio-only home receiver/amplifiers that have standard RCA-type input connectors. Y ou may have to select a front panel button on your A V receiver to switch audio inputs to hear sound. Use the 2.1 configuration for multichannel A V receivers that have only left and right audio inputs. Connecting a home stereo to an HP Digital Entertainment Center typically requires audio cables that are long enough to connect from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the stereo or A V receiver . Additional cables are sold separately . n Y ou can also connect video through your A V receiver or to your TV directly . Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: â2.0 Home Stereo Inst allationâ on page 41 â2.1 Home Stereo Inst allationâ on page 42 â4.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 43 â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 â7.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 45 Y ou can also use a digital connection. âDigital Home Theater Audioâ on page 46
Connecting Audio 41 Connecting Audio 2.0 Home Stereo Installation The following diagram shows a typical two-channel (2.0) speaker installation that uses passive stereo speakers connected through a home ster eo standard left and right input. This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled CD, DVD, or DVD In. 2.0 audio system connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OU T SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L V IDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDE O Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN 2 Channel AV Receiver LR A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
42 HP Digital Entertainment Center 2.1 Home Stereo Installation The following diagram shows a typical two-channel (2.1) speaker installation that uses passive stereo speakers connected through a home stereo standard left and right input. This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Use this conf iguration for multichannel A V receivers that only left and right audio inputs. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled CD, DVD, or DVD In. 2.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers generate the subwoofer output without a subwoofer input; in this case, you do not need to connect the subwoofer output from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L V IDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDE O Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN LR 2.1 Channel AV Receiver A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Audio 43 Connecting Audio 4.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio four-channel 4/4.1 speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on a receiver/amplifier . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 4.1 or 4 Channel inputs, CD, DVD, or DVD In. 4.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers generate the subwoofer output without a subwoofer input; in this case, you do not need to connect the subwoofer output from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN 4.1 Channel AV Receiver A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
44 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio six-channel (5.1 ) speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Use this conf iguration for 6.1 and 7.1 A V receivers that upmix the rear speaker(s). Use the 2.1 configuration for 5.1 A V receivers that have only left and right inputs. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. A V receiver audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 5.1 or 6 Channel Inputs, DVD, Ext. In, or Multichannel Inputs. 5.1 multichannel audio system connection n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BAC K SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN AUDIO IN 5.1 Channel AV Receiver
Connecting Audio 45 Connecting Audio 7.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio eight-channel (7.1) speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. If your A V receiver suppor ts 7.1 and has only 5.1 inputs, see â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44. A V receiver audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 7.1 or 8 Channel inputs, DVD, Ext. In, or Multichannel Inputs. 7.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 channels. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 A UDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Surr . Back Surround Center Sub Front AUDIO IN 7.1 Channel AV Receiver
46 HP Digital Entertainment Center Digital Home Theater Audio The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts digital audio output. â For TV and music: two-channel stereo. (Y our A V receiver may separate the audio signal into multiple channels.) â For DVD playback: the multiple channel Dolby Digital 5.1 or DTS Digital encoded audio signal passes to your A V receiver for decoding. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. Y ou can connect either the coaxial or the optical digital audio cable, depending on your system. If you have both cables, connect only one cable. Do not connect analog multichannel speaker outputs if you connect the digital output. â Insert optical cords straight in until they click into place. â Do not bend or tie optical cords. T o connect digital audio from your HP Digital Entertainment Center to an A V receiver: 1 Connect the Digital Audio Out connector on the back panel of your HP Digital En tertainment Center to the Digital Input (S/PDIF) on your A V receiver or digital audio system. 2 Select the A V receiver input. 3 Use the A V receiver to adjust the volume. The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio six-channel 5.1 speaker installation that requires a digital input on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different, such as having more speakers. n Some A V receivers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 channels. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps.
Connecting Audio 47 Connecting Audio Digital 5.1 multichannel audio system connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SU RROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Choose one DIGIT AL AUDIO IN Coaxial Optical Digital Audio Out Recommended for best digital audio experience 5.1 Channel AV Receiver
48 HP Digital Entertainment Center Powered Speaker Audio Connection Y ou can connect active (powered) speakers directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . An active speaker system must have its own power cord. Y ou may need Y adapter cables (sold separately). Y adapter cables The HP Digital Entertainment Center has RCA-type output connectors. Y ou may need to connect Y adapter cables between your HP Digital Entertainment Center analog audio output and your powered speaker inputs. Y ou can also use them for audio inputs depending on your equipment. Use Y adapter cables with one female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo mini-jack on one end and two male RCA connectors on the other end. These cables are sold separately . The number of Y adapter cables you need to connect to your home stereo system depends on the number of speakers you install. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 â4.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 50 â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 â7.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 52 Y ou can also use a digital connection. âDigital Powered Speakersâ on page 53 Select the cable that most closely matches your home system: 2.1 speaker system: 1 Y adapter cable 4.1 speaker system: 2 Y adapter cables 5.1 speaker system: 3 Y adapter cables 7.1 speaker system: 4 Y adapter cables n Y adapter cables and extension cables are sold separately .
Connecting Audio 49 Connecting Audio 2.1 Powered Speakers T o connect simple left/right stereo (2.0) active speakers: Or T o connect two speakers and a subwoofer for 2.1 speaker output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cable (sold separately) to the Front Right and Front Left Audio Out connectors on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapter cable to the Audio Line In cable of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. 2.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AC Subwoofer A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
50 HP Digital Entertainment Center 4.1 Powered Speakers T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, and a subwoofer for four-channel (4.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables (sold separately) to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Su rround Right, and Surround Left on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audio Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. 4.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BA CK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Subwoofer AC A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Audio 51 Connecting Audio 5.1 Powered Speakers T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer for six-channel (5.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables (sold separately) to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Surround Right, Surround Left, and Center on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audio Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. T ypical 5.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Subwoofer Center Speaker AC
52 HP Digital Entertainment Center 7.1 Powered Speakers Y ou can install a 7.1 audio system to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, two surround back speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer for eight-channel (7.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Center , Surround Right, Surround Left, Surround Back on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audi o Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. T ypical 7.1 powered speaker installation n Some powered speakers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 input channels. Refer to your product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Subwoofer Center Speaker AC
Connecting Audio 53 Connecting Audio Digital Powered Speakers Y ou can install a digital audio system with up to two front speakers, two surround speakers, two surround back speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not connect analog multichannel speaker outputs if you connect the digital output. Y ou can connect either the coax ial or optical digital audio cable, depending on your system. If you have both cables, connect one cable only . â Insert optical cords straight in until they click into place. â Do not bend or tie optical cords. T o connect six-channel (5.1 speaker) di gital output to a speaker digital input: 1 Connect a digital audio coaxial or optical cable to a Digital Audio Out connector on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the digital audio coaxial or optical cable to the speakers. 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. Digital powered speaker installation (5.1 shown) n Some powered speakers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 input channels. Refer to your product documentation. DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SU RROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Choose one DIGIT AL AUDIO IN Coaxial Optical Digital Audio Out ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN
54 HP Digital Entertainment Center Monitor Speakers Y ou can connect powered monitor speakers directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y ou may need Y adapter cables. Yo u c a n : â Connect simple left/right stereo 2.0 powered monitor speakers. Or â C onnect two powered speakers and a subwoofer for 2.1 monitor speaker output. Monitor speaker installation (2.0 shown) n Monitor speaker configurations and connections may vary . Y our system may be different. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VID EO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Audio Out Monitor
Connecting Audio 55 Connecting Audio Audio In Connections Y ou can connect your existi ng home stereo or home theater audio equipment, such as a tape player or turntable, to your HP Digital Enter tainment Center using the Audio In stereo connectors on the back panel. The Audio In connection can be used in conjunction with sound recording software (application software sold separately) to record audio from other external equipment. The following diagram shows a typical Audio In stereo connection. This is only a su ggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Audio In stereo connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AU DIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK S URROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER OUT or T ape Player T urntable Audio In ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN n A turntable might require special phono inputs through a mixer .
56 HP Digital Entertainment Center FM Radio Antenna The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes an FM radio tuner . T o connect the FM radio antenna: 1 Plug the FM radio antenna cable into the FM (T uner) In connector on the back panel (75-Ohm Coaxial). 2 Y ou may want to extend the ends of the cable to improve your FM radio signal reception. The following diagram shows typical FM antenna connections: â Indoor antenna Or â Rooftop antenna (sold separately) This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. FM radio antenna cable external or internal connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER FM Antenna FM Radio Roof Antenna Choose one ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ANSMITTER OUT 1 2 O S-VIDEO 802.11 b/g ENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN F M ANTENNA IN S-VIDEO 75 ⦠C O AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN N SMITTER OUT 1 2 S-VIDEO 802.11 b/g NA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN - VIDEO 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Video Out Connecting Video Out 57 Connecting V ideo Out This chapter describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV or display monitor , so you can watch TV and view the screen. It includes the most typical, and some advanced, video output options. Y ou must have a display such as a TV or monitor connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. HP Digital Entertainment Centers support many different video options, connections, and configurations of TVs and monitors. Y our system may have different equipment. TV HP Digital Enter tainment Center On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âVideo Out Overviewâ on page 58 âT ypical Video Out Connectionsâ on page 63 âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64 âVideo Out from A V Receiver to TVâ on page 66 âVideo Out to Monitorâ on page 68 âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69
58 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out Over view V ideo Out Connection Over view The back panel connector that you hook up to your TV is labeled Video Out. Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Standard definition television: â Video (composite) â S-video â Component (Y , Pb, Pr) High definition capable plas ma, LCD, or HDTV display: â Video (composite) â S-video â Component (Y , Pb, Pr) â VGA â DVI Monitor: â VGA â DVI The type of video cable you need depends on your TV : â If your TV has a composite video jack, you may need a composite video cable. â If your TV has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals, and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable does. â For component video, see âComponent Video Settingsâ on page 60. T o connect a TV to the HP Digital Enter tainment Center , you may need a video cable and an audio cable. Use a video cable to connect the Video Out on the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV Video In. These cables are included in the box. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your TV or monitor . When using an A V receiver , the Video Out cable can be connected directly to a TV and just the audio is connected and switched through an A V receiver , or video and audio are connected and switched through an A V receiver . When using an A V receiver , do not switch video types such as connecting a Component In to a Composite Out. Not all A V receivers suppor t signal conversion. Some HP Digital Entertainment Center models output NTSC only . n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video.
Connecting Video Out 59 Connecting Video Out V ideo Out Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Cable type Video (composite) RCA jack Y ellow S-video Y/C video 4-pin Black Component (interlaced or progressive scan) See http://www .hp.com/suppor t for instructions on using component video. 3 RCA jacks Green: Y Blue: Pb Red: Pr VGA Analog: 15-pin D-sub Vid eo Out Blue DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y Pb Pr COMPONENT OUT VGA
60 HP Digital Entertainment Center Component V ideo Settings Y ou must configure settings to view component video on your TV properly . Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. Overview Y ou must change the default desktop resolution of 800 x 600 to 640 x 480 for the best DVD playback and Media Center experience. A resolution of 800 x 600 is best for Windows desktop dialog boxes. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. The component video default output is 480i (interla ced) to provide a picture on most TVs. Driver adjustments are required to configure progressive scan for TVs that support progressive scan. Progressive scan format provides a better desktop viewing experience than interlaced format. Content-protected DVD playback is limited to the following when component video is connected: Digital Video Out (DVI) Digital: 29-pin D-sub DVI-I Or Analog: Vid eo Ou t White Item Connector T ype Color Cable type DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI n HP recommends initial setup using VGA or composite video. Component format Desktop resolution 480i (interlaced) 640 x 480 @ 30 Hz 480p (progressive) 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz
Connecting Video Out 61 Connecting Video Out TV Display Over view The HP Digital Entertainment Center allows you to connect to a TV to view the monitor image on a TV screen. With the TV connected, you can view the HP Digital Entertainment Center image, watch TV or DVD movies, or play games on your TV . See âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69. Y ou must manually set up dual displays (clone). Only either the TV or monitor , not both, will display after initial turn on. See âDual screenâ on page 142. Audio and V ideo Switching Over view A V receiver: Y ou can use your A V receiver as a switch to direct the video to your TV and the audio to your speakers from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . This method gives you the best audio quality , and is easy to switch audio/video inputs though your A V receiver remote. If your A V receiver has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output on the A V receiver front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. TV : If you have multiple audi o/video inputs on your TV , you can use your TV as an audio/video switch and control inputs though your TV remote. If your TV has multiple input connections, then it has a front panel input switch. Y ou must select the correct input and output on the TV front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. Monitor: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your monitor , you can use your monitor as an audio/ video switch. Y ou will probably not be able to use a remote control to switch. If your monitor has multiple input and output connections, then it has a front panel inpu t switch and output switch. Y ou must select the correc t input and output on the monitor front panel to hear sound and see video. n If your video equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the video equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video.
62 HP Digital Entertainment Center Using the Remote Contr ol with Y our TV Y ou can use the HP Digital Enter tainment Center remote control to change channels and adjust volume if you have a cable box or satellite receiver , have installed the Infrared T ransmitter cable, and have configured the remote control after initial turn on. Always point the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control at the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel. The infrared remote sensor , behind the front panel window , receives signals from the remote control. The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes one or two Infrared T ransmitter cables (IR blaster) that are required to control one or two set-top boxes. Y ou must carefully position the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip on the set-top box to ensure the set-top box receives the IR signal from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âInfrared T ransmitter Installationâ on page 99.
Connecting Video Out 63 Connecting Video Out T ypical V ideo Out Connections This section describes how to hook up the Video Out connectors on the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center into your home system so you can watch TV . These are only suggested co nfigurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. Y ou may set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Ce nter for the following supported configurations: Display/video configuration See: From HP Digital Entertainment Center to TV through a direct connection âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64 From HP Digital Entertainment Center through an A V receiver , to a TV âVideo Out from A V Receiver to TVâ on page 66 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to a monitor through a direct connection âVideo Out to Monitorâ on page 68 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV and monitor , dual-display option (Y ou must manually set dual displays.) âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69 Other Video Equipment âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101 Then see: âConnecting TV Source Inâ on page 71 âConfiguring Videoâ on page 141
64 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out to TV Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your TV , you can use your TV as an audio/video switch and control inputs though your TV remote. Connectors: Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Equipment: The TV and some cables are sold separately . Refer to the documentation that came with your TV/display . Y ou can also connect a video projector using this procedure. Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV display , after initial turn on, using the Media Center software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: Connect a video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the TV Video In. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. n If the S-video and composite Video Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks turn off automatically and you see no picture. Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center .
Connecting Video Out 65 Connecting Video Out . DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE -OUT SURROUND BACK SUR ROUND CE NTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER S-video Component * Video TV IN Choose one * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BAC K SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VID EO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN S-video Component * Video Choose one VGA HDTV IN DVI * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. Video out to standard TV Video out to high-definition capable HDTV
66 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out fr om A V Receiver to TV Switching: Switch audio and video through your A V receiver if your A V receiver switches video and has the correct connections. This method gives you the best audio quality , and you can easily switch audio/video inputs through your A V receiver remote. Connectors: Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Equipment: The TV , A V receiver , and some cables are sold separately . See the documentation that came with your TV and A V receiver . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV display , after initial turn on, using the Media Center software settings. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: 1 Connect a video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out to the AV r e c e i v e r V i d e o I n . 2 Connect a video cable from the A V receiver Video Out to the TV Video In. Use the same connector type if your A V receiver does not support cross-connecting. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI n If the S-video and composite Video Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatically . Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center . If your TV and A V receiver has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the TV and A V receiver front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video.
Connecting Video Out 67 Connecting Video Out . TV Out (through A V receiver) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7 .1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUN D CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Video Choose one Component * TV IN A V RECEIVER IN Choose one and keep same type as A V Receiver In S-video Video Component * S-video A V RECEIVER OUT A V Receiver * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
68 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out to Monitor Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your monitor , you can use your monitor as an audio/ video switch. Y ou will probably not be able to use a remote control as a switch. Connectors: For a monitor , choose one of the following Video Out connectors and cables: â VGA â DVI Equipment: The monitor and some cables may not be included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See the documentation that came with your monitor . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the monitor display , after initial turn on, using th e Media Center software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: Connect a monitor video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the monitor Video In. Monitor out DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Choose one VGA MONITOR IN DVI HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER n If your monitor has multiple input connections, then it has a front panel input switch. Y ou must select the correct input from the monitor front panel or remote contr ol to hear sound and see video.
Connecting Video Out 69 Connecting Video Out V ideo Out to TV and Monitor Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on y ou r T V or mo n it or, y ou c an us e yo u r T V o r mo ni t or as a n audio/video switch. Y ou can use a TV remote control to switch inputs. If your A V receiver switches video and has the correct connections, you can connect your TV or monitor through your A V receiver . Connectors: Choose Video Out connectors and corresponding cables that atta ch to the back of your TV and monitor: Y ou can use the following combinations to connect your TV and monitor: Y ou cannot view any combination of Video (composite), S-video, or Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Video Out at the same time with dual displays. Equipment: The TV , monitor , and some cables may not be included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See the documentation that came with your TV and monitor . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV and monitor displays, after initial turn on, using the Media Center . software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: 1 Connect a monitor video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the monitor Video In. Use the VGA or DVI V ideo Out connectors. 2 Connect your TV to the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel. Use the Video (composite), S-video, or Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Video Out connectors for standard definition TVs. 3 After initial turn on, you will need to activate dual displays. See âDual screenâ on page 142. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI Display Use with VGA V ideo (composite) S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) DVI DVI Video (composite) S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA n If the S-video and Video (composite) V ideo Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatically . Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center .
70 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV (standard definition shown) and monitor out n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. n If your TV or monitor has multiple input connections, select the correct input on the TV or monitor . DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV IN VGA MONITOR IN DVI S-video Component Video Choose one Choose one HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In Connecting TV Source In 71 Connecting TV Source In This chapter describes how to connect TV source input from a set-top box such as a cable box or satellite receiver to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Infrared T ransmitter cable installation is also included. Y ou connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to an existing setup for your TV signal source. This chapter includes the most typical, and some advanced, input options. The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different video source input options, connections, and set-top-box configurations, such as a cable box or satellite receiver . Y our home system may have different components. Cable Set-top box Infrared T ransmitter HP Digital Entertainment Center On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âTV Source Over viewâ on page 72 âT ypical TV Source Connectionsâ on page 78 âAntenna Connectionâ on page 80 âCable Connectionâ on page 83 âSatellite Connectionâ on page 93 âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97 n For additional information on connecting the cable box or satellite receiver , refer to the documentation that came with your equipment and the Start Here booklet included.
72 HP Digital Entertainment Center TV Source Over view TV Signal Source Over view Y ou must connect a TV signal to the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. Y ou can attach standard, analog NTSC TV and high-definition, digital HDTV A TSC sources. The back panel TV Source connectors are: â TV Source 1 In â TV Source 2 In â Cable/antenna In (NTSC) RF â HDTV/SDTV Ant. In (A TSC) RF antenna NTSC Standard TV The NTSC back panel connectors are TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In: â For an NTSC cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver use TV Source 1 In or TV Source 2 In (select models only). â For an NTSC analog cable RF coaxial connector use Cable/antenna In. For dual-tuner systems, the Cable/antenna In RF connector splits internally . A set-top cable TV box is provided by your cable TV provider to unscramble premium channels. For Dual T uner configurations, both TV sources must be of the same type: either cable TV , digital cable TV , satellite TV , or antenna. The TV sources must also have the same, identical channel lineup; for example, if you are using two satellite TV sources they must provide the exact same channels. All TV viewing and scheduling is provided through the T elevision Program Guide in Media Center , so both TV sources must have identical T elevision Program Guides. The HP Digital Entertainment Center records television and allows you to control th e television channels. The HP Digital Entertainment Center has two tuner configurations available: n An A TSC tuner that supports high-definition TV is included with select HP Digital Entertainment Center models only . Single-tuner TV Source 1 In A single tuner allows you to watch or record one program only in NTSC. Dual-tuner option TV Source 2 In Y ou can have dual TV inputs, if your HP Digital Entertainment Center includes the two TV tuner option. Y ou can watch a show on one channel while Media Center records another show on a different channel. Or you can record two different programs at the same time, using two tuners in NTSC.
Connecting TV Source In 73 Connecting TV Source In A TSC high-definition TV If your HP Digital Entertainment Center includes an optional HDTV/SDTV Ant. In tuner card and dual NTSC tuner card configuration, you can view and record A TSC channels. Media Center supports over-the-air A TSC digital TV . Over-the-air A TSC digital TV requires a UHF/VHF antenna (sold separately) to receive the digital signal. Y our location must be within an HDTV A TSC broadcast area. The A TSC high-definition DTV (Digital TV) source back panel connector is as follows: â HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connected to a UHF/VHF antenna. See the following section for more information on HDTV . Then see the instructions to install HDTV A TSC. Connecting an A TSC antenna Y ou can attach an indoor or outdoor UHF/VHF antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center to watch HDTV A TSC through the VHF or UHF channels. A UHF/VHF antenna receives HDTV A TSC channels, depending on the quality (gain) of the antenna, geographic location, and broadcast reception strength. An internal or external roof antenna is sold separately . Y ou might have to reposition the antenna for best reception. Position the antenna based on the following general criteria: â Higher; the ideal position is above the roofline. â Closer to or facing the broadcast tower . â Larger for stronger signals. â Outdoor for less interference. Refer to http://www .antennaweb.or g for more information about: â The channels available in your area. The channels may be color coded by zone. â Selecting the kind of antenna you need depending on the channels you want to receive. Match your antenna to your zone. â The direction to point your antenna. â Positioning an HDTV antenna for best reception. n Y ou can also attach an internal or external roof VHF antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center to watch NTSC channels.
74 HP Digital Entertainment Center Additional HDTV Information What is HDTV? HDTV (High-definition T elevision) is the highest quality DTV standard. HDTV provides increased picture detail (720p, 1080i) with a widescreen16:9 aspect ratio and higher quality audio such as surround sound, on a display that supports digital TV . HDTV/SDTV Ant. In is the connector on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center that you connect the A TSC signal to. SDTV (Standard-definition T elevision) is the lowest quality DTV standard. AT S C (Advanced T elevision Systems Committee) is the official name of the DTV picture format that is in use in the United States and North America. The tuner inside your HP Digital Entertainment Center is A TSC-capable. DTV (Digital T elevision) is the umbrella term used to describe the new digital television way of transmitting television signals. DTV includes many formats of high- definition TV that can broadcast an image resolution of up to 2 million pixels. NTSC (National T elevision Systems Committee) is standard (analog) TV . Standa rd TV broadcasts an image resolution of about 210,000 pixels and is distributed today through antenna, cable, digital cable, or satellite. About digital TV in Media Center Digital TV for Windows ® XP Media Center Edition 2005 is available in the United States only . Refer to the Readme for Update 1 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 with HDTV for all digital TV requirements. Refer to the Microsoft W eb site at: http://www .microsoft.com
Connecting TV Source In 75 Connecting TV Source In TV Source Connectors Over view Y our standard television set- top box has one or more of the following video output connectors and cables: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video Do not switch video types such as connecting S-video In to TV Source 1 and Composite Video In to TV Source 2 or a Coaxial In and a Composite Out. Not all set-top boxes and A V receivers suppor t signal conversion. The type of video cable you need depends on your set- top box: â If your set-top box has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable to connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to your set-top box. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals, and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable. â If your set-top box has a composite video jack, you need a composite video cable. â If you are connecting dual NTSC set-top box sources to the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual NTSC tuner with an composite video connection, use a composite to S-video adapter (sold separately) on TV Source 2 in. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your TV signal source. Connecting a set-top box A standard cable set-top bo x has only NTSC channels, but you can connect a UHF/VHF antenna to view HDTV A TSC channels also. A set-top cable TV box is provided by your cable TV provider to unscramble premium channels. Y ou cannot record digital TV if using the HP Digital Entertainment Center with an HDTV cable box or HDTV satellite box. Use an antenna to record digital TV . If you can receive HDTV channels through cable or satellite providers, connect the signal directly to your TV/display . Refer to your TV/display documentation.
76 HP Digital Entertainment Center TV Source Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Cable Audio TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Video (composite) TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow S-video (4-pin) TV Source 1 In Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Cable/Antenna In With internal splitter to dual-tuners Coaxial Silver Audio TV Source 2 In (Select models only) RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER TV SOURCE 1 AUDIO R L S-VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN F M DUAL TUNER TV SOURCE 2 AUDIO R L
Connecting TV Source In 77 Connecting TV Source In Additional cables to install the HP Digita l Entertainment Center are sold separately . S-video TV Source 2 In (select models only) Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Coaxial (from UHF/ VHF antenna) Silver Infrared T ransmitter Out 2 por ts: 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jacks Silver Item Connector T ype Color Cable 2 IN S-VIDEO HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER O UT 1 2
78 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical TV Source Connections These are only suggested configuratio ns. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: TV source type Display/video configuration Connector See: Antenna Standard NTSC from UHF/VHF antenna Cable/Ant. In âAntenna (NTSC)â on page 80 HDTV A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âAntenna (A TSC)â on page 81 NTSC from UHF/VHF antenna AT S C f r o m U H F / V H F a n t e n n a Cable/Ant. In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âAntenna (NTSC and A TSC)â on page 82 NTSC cable and A TSC antenna NTSC analog cable directly from the wall (without a set-top box) and A TSC from UHF/ VHF antenna Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âCable (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 83 One NTSC cable TV set-top box and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Or Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. in âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 84 T wo NTSC cable TV set-top boxes and A TSC from UHF/ VHF antenna TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e R e c e i v e r s (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 86 NTSC digital cable or satellite and A TSC antenna One NTSC digital cable or satellite receiver and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Or Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 84 T wo NTSC digital cable or satellite receivers and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e R e c e i v e r s (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 86
Connecting TV Source In 79 Connecting TV Source In NTSC cable Cable directly from the wall (without a cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver) Cable/Ant. In âCable Only (NTSC)â on page 88 One cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver TV Source 1 In Or Cable/Ant. In âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC)â on page 89 T wo cable TV set-top boxes, or digital cable receivers TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e Receiversâ on page 91 NTSC satellite One satellite receiver TV Source 1 In Or Cable/Ant. In âOne Satellite Receiver (NTSC)â on page 93 T wo satellite receivers TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In âT wo Satellite Receivers (NTSC)â on page 95 NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite One NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite receiver TV Source 1 In (to record HDTV in standard format) Connect the cable A TSC signal directly to your TV/ display to view HDTV . Refer to the TV/display documentation. T wo NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite receivers TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In (to record HDTV in standard format) Connect the cable A TSC signal directly to your TV/ display to view HDTV . Refer to the TV/display documentation. Then see: âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97 (cable TV bo x, digital cable receiver , or satellite receiver only) âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101 TV source type Display/video configuration Connector See:
80 HP Digital Entertainment Center Antenna Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Antenna (NTSC) : TV signal source â TV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Roof TV Antenna Coaxial HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER VHF Antenna UHF Antenna I f you are using a NTSC UHF / VHF b roa d cast te l evision antenna (sold separately) with no cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver , do the following to connect the TV signal source: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your external or internal TV antenna into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 81 Connecting TV Source In Antenna (A TSC) : TV signal source â HDTV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER Roof TV Antenna Coaxial VHF Antenna UHF Antenna T o connect an HDTV signal source to your HP Digital Entertainment Center , do the following: 1 Connect a coaxial cable from your UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
82 HP Digital Entertainment Center Antenna (NTSC and A TSC) HDTV and standard signal source â TV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN 1 DTV AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL Roof Antenna Coaxial Splitter 2 Way Splitter VHF Antenna UHF Antenna If you are using a VHF and UHF broadcast television antenna (sold separately) with no cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver , do the following to connect the NTSC and A TSC TV signal source to your HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Install a splitter (provided) as shown in the following illustration (select models only). Connect the splitter input to the antenna (outdoor shown). 2 Connect two coaxial cables to the splitter outputs. T urn the connectors to tighten them. 3 Connect a coaxial cable into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T u rn the connector to tighten it. 4 Connect a coaxial cable into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 83 Connecting TV Source In Cable Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Cable (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) . TV signal source NTSC cable and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVIT Y LINK CABLE /ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER UHF Antenna Cable From W all Coaxial VHF Antenna Coaxial Roof Antenna T o connect standard cable without a set-top box and a HDTV/SDTV Ant. In input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center , do the following to connect the NTSC and A TSC TV signal sources: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your TV cable (wall) into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. 3 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
84 HP Digital Entertainment Center One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) T o connect a standard set-top box (sold separately) and an HDTV/SDTV Ant. In input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center using a standard set-top box, satellite receiver , or digital cable receiver with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your cable TV source (wall) is plugged into the set-top box or digital cable receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable: a Choose a video out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Video Output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 Connect the set-top box Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
Connecting TV Source In 85 Connecting TV Source In . TV signal source â one cable TV or digital cable box (NTSC) and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER OUT TV Source 1 Video Coaxial Coaxial S-video Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter Choose one Cable W all Coaxial Roof TV Antenna VHF Antenna UHF Antenna
86 HP Digital Entertainment Center T wo Cable TV Boxes, or T wo Digital Cable Receivers (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) Y ou must have two identical set-top boxes â such as two digital cable receivers, two satellite receivers, or two cable TV boxes (sold separately) â from the same TV source and the HP Digital Ente rtainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the NTSC TV signal source from each set-top box or digital cable receiver in to each of the HP Digital Entertainment Center tunersâ TV Source 1 and TV Source 2. If you are using two matching set-top cable boxes, with S-video or composite video ou tput, do the following to connect two tuners and a HDTV A TSC input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Make sure that: â Cable TV box: A coaxial cable connector from your cable source (wall) is plugged into a cable splitter (provided), then into each cable set-top box In connector . This setup is similar to the illustration âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. â Digital cable receiver: A coaxial cable connector from two cable sources (wall) is plugged into each digital cable receiver IN connector . See âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. 2 Connect a video cable for set-top box 1. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for set-top box 2: a Choose a video out connector; use the same type as set-top box 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 6 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center .
Connecting TV Source In 87 Connecting TV Source In 7 Connect the set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 8 Connect the set-top box 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two cable boxes (NTSC) and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter Source 1 Video Set-top box 1 Coaxial Set-top box 2 Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Video S-video W all Cable W all Cable Coaxial Coaxial S-video Choose one Choose one Roof TV Antenna VHF Antenna UHF Antenna HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
88 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cable Only (NTSC) If you are using a standard ca ble without a set-top box or digital cable receiver , do th e following to connect the NTSC-only TV signal source: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your TV cable (wall) into the Cable/Ant connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . This connection supplies the TV signal source for both TV tuners. 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. . TV signal source (NTSC cable) CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Cable W all Coaxial HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 89 Connecting TV Source In One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) Connect the NTSC TV signal source from the standard cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver (sold separately) into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you are using a standard set-top box or digital cable receiver with S-video or co mposite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your cable TV source (wall) is plugged into the set-top box or digital cable receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable: a Choose a video out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Video Output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the set-top box Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
90 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV signal source â one cable TV or digital cable box (NTSC) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNE R OUT TV Source 1 Video Coaxial S-video Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter Choose one Cable From W all Coaxial
Connecting TV Source In 91 Connecting TV Source In T wo Cable TV Boxes, or T wo Digital Cable Receivers Y ou must have two identical set-top boxes, such as two digital cable receivers or two cable TV boxes (sold separately), from the same TV source and the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the TV signal source from each set-top box or digital cable receiver into each of the HP Digital Entertainment Center tunersâ TV Source 1 and TV Source 2. If you are using two matching set-top cable boxes or digital cable receivers with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that: â Cable TV box: A coaxial cable connector from your cable source (wall) is plugged into a cable splitter (provided), then into each cable set-top box In connector . This setup is similar to the illustration âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. â Digital cable receiver: A coaxial cable connector from two cable sources (wall) is plugged into each digital cable receiver IN connector . See âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. 2 Connect a video cable for set-top box 1. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for set-top box 2: a Choose a video out connector; use the same type as set-top box 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors.
92 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 Connect the set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 7 Connect the set-top box 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter Source 1 Video Set-top box 1 Cable From W all Cable From W all Coaxial Set-top box 2 Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Video S-video Coaxial S-video Choose one Choose one HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 93 Connecting TV Source In Satellite Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) One Satellite Receiver (NTSC) Connect the TV signal source from the satellite receiver into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you are using a satellite receiver (sold separately) with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your dish source is plugged into the satellite receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the satellite receiver Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
94 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV signal source â one satellite receiver (NTSC) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNE R TV Source 1 Video Coaxial S-video Choose one OUT Infrared T ransmitter Coaxial Satellite Receiver HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 95 Connecting TV Source In T wo Satellite Receivers (NTSC) Y ou must have two identical satellite receivers from the same source and the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the TV signal source from each satellite receiver into each HP Digital Entertainment Center tuner . If you are using two matching satellite receivers with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your dish source is plugged into two cable outputs, and each satellite receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable for satellite receiver 1: a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for satellite receiver 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and the Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for satellite receiver 2: a Choose a video out connector , use the same type as satellite receiver 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for satellite receiver 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors.
96 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 Connect the satellite receiver 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 7 Connect the satellite receiver 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two satellite re ceivers (NTSC) (select models only) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTE R OUT 1 2 TV SOUR CE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Source 1 Video Choose one Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Choose one Video S-video Infrared T ransmitter S-video Satellite Receiver 1 Satellite Receiver 2 Coaxial (RF) HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 97 Connecting TV Source In Infrared T r ansmitter Connection Infrared T ransmitter Over view The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes infrared transmitters that make it easy to control one or two set-top boxes. If you connect a set-top box such as a digital cable box or a satellite receiver to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , then you must also use the Infrared (IR) T ransmitter control cable. The remote contr ol sends commands to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , which relays these commands via the Infrared T ransmitter contro l cables to the cable box or satellite receiver . The Infrared T ransmitter control cable has a sender tip (IR Blaster) that attaches to the front of the cable box (or other set-top box) and plugs into the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y ou must carefully position the Infrared Tr ansmitter control cable sender tip on to the set-top box front panel to ensure the set-top box receives the signal. The remote receiver is on the front of the cable box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver . It receives Infrared commands from your cable box remote control or from the Infrared T ransmitter cable. The remote receiver is sometimes hidden behind a panel of dark, transparent plastic. Y ou can use a flashlight to locate it. For more information about the remote receiver , refer to the documentation for your cable box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver . n The Infrared T ransmitter connection is required for a signal with a set-top box.
98 HP Digital Entertainment Center Infrared T ransmitter connection (one set-top box) Infrared T ransmitter connection (two set-top boxes; select models only) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Set-top box 1 Set-top box 2 Note: Connect set-top box only Infrared T ransmitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 99 Connecting TV Source In Infrared T ransmitter Installation If you have a cable TV receiver , satellite receiver , or other set-top box that controls your TV signal, connect the Infrared T ransmitter sensor: 1 Route the Infrared T ransmitter cable from the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the cable TV , digital cable, or satellite receiver set-top box. 2 Locate the IR remote receiver area on the front of the set-top box. This is where you aim the set-top box remote control to change channels, change the sound level, and so on. â The IR remote receiver area may be behind an obvious window on the set-top box. â Use the set-top box remote control to locate its IR remote receiver area: Hold the remote control ver y close (within 1 inch/2.54 centimeters) and press a remote button to change the channel or power off the box. As you push a button, gradually move the remote control across the front of the box until the box responds. â Hold a flashlight close to the front of the set-top box, and look for a transparent window with a small box inside. T est the area by holding the box remote close to the window and pushing a button until the box responds. 3 Use a piece of tape to temporarily hold the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip over the set-top box IR remote receiver area while you test the function. 4 Plug the Infrared T ransmitter cable into the Infrared T ransmitter connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 T est the operation by po inting the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control at the HP Digital Entertainment Center IR receiver and pressing a channel button. (Be sure you use the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote and point it at the HP Digital Entertainment Center .) 6 For permanent attachment, remove the paper from the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip, and press the tip onto the IR remote receiver area on the set-top box. 7 Repeat these steps for the second set-top box.
100 HP Digital Entertainment Center The following illustration shows the Infrared T ransmitter installation. Infrared transmitter to cable, digital cabl e receiver , or satellite receiver set-top box DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter ATSC TUNE R Attach to IR window Remove tape Cable or Satellite Set-top box HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting V ideo Equipment Connecting Video Equipment 101 Connecting V ideo Equipment This chapter describes how to connect video playback and recording equipment to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Equipment includes VCRs and camcorders. This chapter also includes the most typical, and some advanced, options. The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different video input and audi o/video output options and connections. Y our system may have different components. On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Digital Entertainment Center VCR Chapter Contents: âVideo Equipment Overviewâ on page 102 âT ypical Video Equipment Connectionsâ on page 104 âVCR Connectionâ on page 105 âVideo Camera Connectionâ on page 109 w A stable image on your TV/display may cause screen burn-in if left on for a long time. Use a screen-saver and low contrast colors for desktop background images to reduce burn-in.
102 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Equipment Over view Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Additional cables and the S-video to composite adapter are sold separately . Item Connector T ype Color Cable Audio: TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Vid eo : TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow S-video TV : Source 1 In Analog: Y/C video 4-pin Black Cable/Antenna In With internal splitter to dual-tuners Coaxial Silver Audio: TV Source 2 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right S-video TV Source 2 In (Select models only) Use S-video to composite adapter to connect composite video Analog: Y/C video 4-pin (optional) Black DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER TV SOURCE 1 AUDIO R L VIDEO S-VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN F M DUAL TUNER TV SOURCE AUDIO R L 2 IN S-VIDEO
Connecting Video Equipment 103 Connecting V ideo Equipment V ideo Equipment Connection Over view Standard video equipment has one or more of the following video out connectors and cables: â Coaxial (RF) â Composite â S-video The type of video cable you need depends on your video equipment: â If your video equipment has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable does. â If your video equipment ha s a composite video jack, you need a composite video cable. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your video equipment. Y ou can also connect your digital video camera to work with the HP Digital Entertainment Center through FireWire (IEEE 1394) connectors. DVD player The HP Digital Entertainment Center has a built-in DVD player/recorder . n If your video equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the video equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. 1394 n The HP Digital Entertainment Center is intended for legal purposes only and not designed to record retail movie title DVDs. n Connect video game boxes directly to your TV .
104 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical V ideo Equipment Connections This section describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to an ex isting setup of your video equipment. These are only suggested configurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: TV source type Display/video configuration See: VCR VCR direct to HP Digital Entertainment Center âVCR Direct In Connectionâ on page 105 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to VCR to TV âW all to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cableâ on page 106 Camcorder Digital âConnecting a Digital Video Camcorderâ on page 109 Analog âConnecting an Analog Camcorderâ on page 112 Then see: âConnecting the Networkâ on page 113 âInitial Configurationâ on page 127
Connecting Video Equipment 105 Connecting V ideo Equipment VCR Connection VCR Direct In Connection Y ou can connect a VCR to record your tapes to th e HP Digital Enter tainment Center hard disk drive. VCR connection n The HP Digital Entertainment Center is intended for legal purposes only . Some retail VHS tapes have content protection measures that do not allow recording. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Video S-video Choose one OUT Coaxial VCR Note: Do not connect audio cables if connecting coaxial cable. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
106 HP Digital Entertainment Center W all to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cable 1 Remove the coaxial cable at the input to the VCR. 2 Connect the coaxial cable to the input of a signal splitter (available at electronics stores). 3 Connect two coaxial cables to the splitter outputs. 4 Connect one coaxial cable to the input of the VCR. 5 Connect one coaxial cable to the TV Source 1 in back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 6 Connect a coaxial cable from the VCR out to one of the TV inputs. Reserve an input connection on the TV for the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Existing setups with and without set-top box Cable From W all Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Cable From W all Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Set-top box
Connecting Video Equipment 107 Connecting V ideo Equipment W all to VCR to TV using coaxial cable (Add the HP Digital Enter tainment Center with a splitter) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUD IO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VI DEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV IN 2 TV IN 1 VCR IN VCR OUT Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Coaxial Coaxial W all Splitter 2 W ay Splitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
108 HP Digital Entertainment Center W all to set-top box VCR to TV using coaxial cable (add with a splitter) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FR ONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VI DEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/ g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTI VITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM AN TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER VCR IN VCR OUT W all Coaxial Splitter Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial Set-top box 2 Way Splitter Coaxial CABLE IN TV IN 2 TV IN 1 CABLE OUT Infrared T ransmitter TV VCR HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting Video Equipment 109 Connecting V ideo Equipment V ideo Camera Connection Refer to the HP support W eb site for detailed information on advanced video setup. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number . See âHP W eb Site Supportâ on page 171. Connecting a Digital V ideo Camcorder Connectors: Use the 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the front or 6-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center to connect a digital video camera. This connector is bi-directional. Some cameras use a USB connector . See the documentation that came with your digital video camera. See âUSB Device Connectionâ on page 121. Equipment: Most digital video cameras use either a 4-pin to 4-pin or a 4-pin to 6-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) video camera transfer cable. A 4-pin to 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) cable to use the 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel is sold separately . Procedure: The following instructions ap ply only to digital video cameras. See âConnecting an Analog Camcorderâ on page 112 for analog video cameras. If a Digital Video Device Auto Play window appears when you connect your camera, click Cancel. T o connect a digital video camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and wait for the desktop to appear . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Tu r n o n t h e d i g i t a l v i d e o c a m e r a . 3 Connect the video camera transfer cable from the camera to a FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the front (4-pin) or back (6-pin) of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 A Found New Hardware message appears. W ait two or three minutes for the system to make the necessar y settings for the new device. When installation is complete, a message appears telling you the camera is ready to use.
110 HP Digital Entertainment Center . Connect a digital video camcorder (front panel) Connect a digital video camcorder (back panel) On / Standby Digital Video Camcorder FireWire Cable (IEEE 1394) DV IN 4-Pin HP Digital Entertainment Center DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Video Camcorder FireWire Cable (IEEE 1394) 6-Pin HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting Video Equipment 111 Connecting V ideo Equipment Recognizing the digital video camcorder If the HP Digital Entertainment Center does not recognize your digital video camera: 1 Start up the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Click Start , and then click Control Panel . 3 Click Performance and Maintenance , if available, and then double-click the System icon. 4 Click the Hardware tab, and then click the Device Manager button. 5 Click the plus sign ( ) next to imaging devices. If the name of the camera appears under imaging devices the device is ready . If the name is not there, try the following: â Click Action , and then Scan for hardware changes . Look in Device Manager for a new addition under imaging devices. â Unplug the video cameraâ s transfer cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Power cycle the camera and plug it back in. Look in Device Manager for a new addition under imaging devices. For more information about viewing your pictures or digital video files in Media Center or copying your pictures to CD, see the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide.
112 HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting an Analog Camcorder Connecting an analog camera for video input (capture) Connectors: When connecting an analog video camera for input to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , use the Video and Audio In connectors on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Procedure: The following instructions ca n also be used to connect digital cameras with analog outputs. See the documentation that came with your video camera. T o connect an analog video camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and wait for the desktop to appear . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Connect the video camera transfer cable from the camera to the S-video conn ector or to the composite and audio connectors on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 3 T urn on the camera and use InterVideo W inDVD Creator to capture your video recording. . Connect an analog video camera for source input On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Analog Camcorder Choose one S-video Video VIDEO OUT
Connecting the Network Connecting the Network 113 Connecting the Network Y our system must have working broadband Internet to operate properly . The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different network options, connections, and configurations. Y ou can connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to a: â Wireless 802.11 b/g network â Wired Ethernet port 10/100/1000 Y ou can connect your peripheral devices to work with the HP Digital Entertainment Center through USB or FireWire (IEEE 1394) connectors. This chapter describes the most typical, and some advanced, options to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to the Inter net, to a network, and to peripheral devices. Y our system may have different components. Internet Broadband Modem HP Digital Enter tainment Center On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114 âT ypical Network Connectionsâ on page 116 âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117 âConnecting a DSL/Cable Modemâ on page 119 âConnecting Through a Routerâ on page 120 âUSB Device Connectionâ on page 121 âConnecting an HP Personal Media Driveâ on page 123 n Peripheral devices are sold separately . n For additional information on connecting network equipment, refer to the Start Here booklet and the hardware and ISP (Internet Service Provider) documentation that came with your network.
114 HP Digital Entertainment Center Peripheral Connection Over view Fr ont Panel (Location, availability , and nu mber of connectors may var y .) Connector Name Description Behind Upper Right Door HP Personal Media Drive Bay Removable hard disk Behind Lower Right Door 9-in-1 Memor y card readers SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive, MS/MS-Pro USB 2.0 (2) Card readers behind lower right door LED: Green (with media inserted) Off (no media inserted) See âMemor y Card Readerâ on page 5. Behind Left Door A V connectivity for capturing analog and digital video from camcorders. Front button and inputs â see below 1394 FireWire (IEEE 1394), 4-pin DV input/output for digital video or removable hard disk drive HP Digital Entertainment Center 1394 input/output USB and card readers HP Personal Media Drive Bay HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC HEADPHONES
Connecting the Network 115 Connecting the Network Back Panel (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Connector Name Description Cable USB 2.0 High-speed USB, 4 ports 1394 FireWire (IEEE 1394), 6-pin DV input/output for hard disk drive Ethernet RJ-45 10/100/1000 Wir el es s LA N Removable Antenna Coaxial wireless LAN 802.11 b/g LEDs (2) Activity: Blinks when transmitting/ receiving data Link: Solid green when wireless LAN is enabled and connected. Blinks when wireless LAN is scanning. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER HI SPEED USB 2.0 1394 10/100/1000 ETHERNET WIRELESS LAN REMOV ABLE ANTENNA 802.11 b/g ACTIVITY LINK
116 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical Network Connections This section describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the Inter net, so you can download the T elevision Program Guide and sur f the W eb. These are only suggested configurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: Connection Network configuration See: Internet Wir el es s or Et he rn et (10BaseT) Or Fast Ethernet (100BaseT) Or Gigabit Ethernet (1000BaseT) From an 802.11 b/g wireless network âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117 From a DSL modem or cable modem to a router âConnecting Through a Routerâ on page 120 From a DSL modem or cable modem âConnecting a DSL/Cable Modemâ on page 119 Then see: âInitial Configurationâ on page 127
Connecting the Network 117 Connecting the Network Connecting the Wireless Network Antenna Y ou can connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to a 802.11 b/g wireless network. The transceiver is built in to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . An exter nal antenna is supplied with your system. Y ou must connect this antenna to connect to the wireless network. Y ou need an existing wireless LAN network with an Internet connection (please consult your ISP for further information). Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center connects with other wireless product(s) via 802.11 b/g technology . The 802.11 b/g wireless LAN function allows you to connect to your home network and other devices that are compatible with the 802.11 b/g wireless LAN. The wireless LAN connects to the Internet. Y ou can establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point, or you can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client if you al ready have a wireless network functioning. Refer to the Quick Install Guide and CD manual included in the acce ssor y box to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point. A wireless access point and a wireless router are required and sold separately . W ireless Internet use requires a separately purchased Internet ser vice contract. Wireless router Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Wireless Router 802. 1 1 b/ g HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
118 HP Digital Entertainment Center T o connect a Wi-Fi antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Screw the antenna into the W ireless LAN Removable Antenna connector on to the back panel, as shown in the following illustration: 2 Y ou may want to move the end of the antenna away from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to improve your signal reception. 3 Check to ensure that: a The wireless router is connected to a DSL/cable modem. b The DSL/cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. c The wireless router power LED and connect LEDs are on. d The DSL/cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. e Y our wireless network functions properly . 4 Select how you want to set up your network: a If you would like a wireless connection between the HP Digital Entertainment Center and your existing wireless network, establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client. The Media Center setup wizard has a step for this option. This is the default mode. b If your HP Digital Entertainment Center is connected to the Internet and you would like to wireless-connect other machines to this HP Digital Entertainment Center , establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point. For more information, refer to the Quick Install Guide and CD manual included in the Wi-Fi accessory box. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI 10/ 100/ 1000 ETHERNET VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 119 Connecting the Network Connecting a DSL/Cable Modem T o connect the HP Digital En ter tainment Center to the Internet, through an existing DSL or cable modem broadband connection: 1 Connect an RJ-45 network cable (sold separately) from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Ethernet connector to a DSL or cable modem. 2 Check the following: a The DSL or cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. b The DSL or cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. Refer to your DSL/cable modem and ISP documentation to establish a connection. DSL/Cable modem direct Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 139 4 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER W all Internet DSL/Cable Modem RJ-45 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
120 HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting Thr ough a Router If you already have a home network functioning, you can connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to a LAN network and then to a DSL modem or cable modem. Y ou can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client if you already have a home network functioning. Refer to your router , DSL/cable modem, and ISP documentation to establish a connection. T o connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to the Internet, through a router and a broadband connection: 1 Connect an RJ-45 network cable (sold separately) from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Ethernet connector to a 10BaseT , 100BaseT , or 1000BaseT port on the router . 2 Check that: a The router is connected to the DSL/cable modem. b The DSL/cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. c The router power LED and connect LEDs are on. d The DSL/cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. Router Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 139 4 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM AN TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Router RJ-45 W all Internet DSL/Cable Modem RJ-45 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 121 Connecting the Network USB Device Connection Digital Still Camera The following instructions ap ply only to digital still cameras. When connecting a digital still camera, use a USB connector on the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o connect a digital still camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . W ait for the desktop to appear . Minimize or close Media Center . 2 T urn on the digital still camera. See the documentation that came with your camera. 3 Connect the camera transfer cable into the camera. 4 Connect the camera transfer cable into an open USB connector on the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Most digital still cameras use either the USB or FireWi re (IEEE 1394) connector . 5 A Found New Hardware message displays. W ait two or three minutes for the system to make the necessar y settings for the new device. When installation is complete, a message displays telling you the camera is ready to use. Digital still camera connection (front panel) Digital still camera connection (back panel) On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center USB 2.0 Digital Camera DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Camera USB 2.0 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
122 HP Digital Entertainment Center Other USB Devices Y ou can connect other peripheral devices to the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center through USB or FireWire (IEEE 1394) ports. The following devices can be connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center USB 2.0 high speed por ts: â iPod â MP3 player â USB drive â External hard disk drive â Printer â Scanner â Digital video camera â Digital still camera â PDA (personal digital assistant) â Keyboard â Mouse Peripheral devices are sold separately . See the documentation that came with your device. Y ou can go to http://www .hp.com to purchase peripheral devices online. T o connect the HP Personal Media Drive to the HP Digital Entertainment Center th rough a USB, see the documentation that came wi th the HP Personal Media Drive. USB device connection (front panel) USB device connection (back panel) On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center USB drive USB 2.0 (x2) iPod DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER iPod Printer Digital camera Portable hard disk drive HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 123 Connecting the Network Connecting an HP Personal Media Drive The HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel includes a drive bay that houses the HP Personal Media Drive. The drive bay has an internal USB por t and power connector . The HP Personal Media Drive can also function as an external USB hard disk drive. Y ou must connect an external USB por t and power cable. Y ou can easily inser t and remove the drive from the bay without turning off the HP Di gital Enter tainment Center . Y ou can use the HP Personal Media Drive without installing the included software. However , HP recommends that you install the software to have access to additional features and read the documentation. For more information about installing the software, refer to the documentation that came with the HP Personal Media Drive. For more information about using an HP Personal Media Drive to store and transfer information, refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . HP Personal Media Drive w Do not move the drive while it is operating, to avoid hardware damage and potential data loss. Y ou can safely remove your drive only after you have completely run the Safely Remove Hardware wizard (located in the system tray at the bottom of the screen). After you have safely disconnected and powered off the drive, handle the drive by the plastic endcaps to avoid touching the aluminum sides if they are hot. The drive may feel warm. This is normal to allow faster heat dissipation.
124 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installing an HP Personal Media Drive T o connect an HP Personal Me dia Drive to the HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Install the HP Personal Media Drive software that is included with the drive (select models only). â For instructions about installing and using the HP Personal Media Drive software, refer to the documentation that came with your HP Personal Media Drive. 2 Open the HP Personal Media Drive bay front panel door . 3 Line up the ridges on the bottom of the drive with the two slots on the bottom of the drive bay . 4 Slide the drive all the way into the drive bay until the drive is firmly connected to the internal power and USB cables. Do not force the drive into the bay; it should slide easily into the bay . 5 If the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the blue power LED on the fr ont of the drive lights up when the drive is inserted correctly . HP Personal Media Drive installation Running the HP Personal Media Drive utility T o transfer files from your primar y hard disk drive to your HP Personal Media Drive, you must first run the utility for each installed Media Drive to access the drive within Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then HP Media Drive . 3 Connect the HP Personal Media Drive. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. For instructions about using the HP Personal Media Drive software, refer to the documentation that came with your HP Personal Media Drive.
Connecting the Network 125 Connecting the Network Disconnecting an HP Personal Media Drive Y ou can safely remove the HP Personal Media Drive when both the amber activity and blue power LEDs are off. T o disconnect your HP Personal Drive safely: 1 Close Media Center and all other programs that may be accessing your HP Personal Media Drive. 2 Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray at the bottom of the desktop. If this icon is hidden, click the arrows on the taskbar to display it. The Safely Remove Hardware window opens. 3 Double-click USB Mass Storage Device to locate your HP Personal Media Drive. USB Mass Storage Device may be listed twice. One may contain a memor y card reader or other mass storage drive. 4 Select the HP Personal Media Drive , and then click OK . This name of the drive may appear as Generic V olume , followed by the assigned drive letter . A Safe to Remove Hardware message appears in the system tray at the bottom of your desktop letting you know that the device is safe to disconnect. 5 Click Close . 6 Open the HP Personal Media Drive bay front panel door . 7 Disconnect the drive from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Disconnecting the HP Personal Media Drive n When your HP Digital Entertainment Center is in standby mode (a reduced power state), the drive turns off. w T o avoid hardware damage and data loss, always disconnect the drive safely , when it is not active. When the amber LED is blinking, the drive is active, saving or transferring data.
126 HP Digital Entertainment Center
Initial Configuration Initial Configuration 127 Initial Configuration This chapter describes how to set up your HP Digital Entertainment Center software, including how to configure the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. When you complete the procedures in this chapter , you can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center in your home entertainment center . Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . n Y ou should only per form the procedures in this chapter after all cables have been connected. Chapter Contents: âStarting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First T imeâ on page 128 âWindows W elcomeâ on page 131 âMedia Center First Runâ on page 132 âConfiguring Audioâ on page 136 âConfiguring Videoâ on page 141 âConfiguring the Systemâ on page 154 w Make sure you have followed all safety instructions for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , especially the impor tant AC power information. See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
128 HP Digital Entertainment Center Star ting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First Time T urn power on to all connected devices such as TV and audio equipment before turning on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Power on only after you have completed the full setup. Installing the Keyboard Batteries (Initial) The keyboard comes with batteries preinstalled. The batteries are fresh from the factor y . 1 T urn the keyboard over . 2 Pull the tab. T o set up your system: ââInstalling the Keyboard Batteries (Initial)â on page 128 âInitial Startupâ on page 129 âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130 âRequired Setupâ on page 132 âOptional Setupâ on page 133 âIf Y our Connections Donât W orkâ on page 135 âAdjusting the Front Panel Display Brightnessâ on page 135 n Use only AA alkaline batteries in the keyboard.
Initial Configuration 129 Initial Configuration Initial Star tup After you have connected the equipment, you are ready to turn on the system. 1 Make sure the video and audio cables are connected before you turn on the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn on all connected system equipment, such as TVs, set-top boxes, and A V receivers. 3 Plug the HP Digital Entertainment Center AC power cable into a wall outlet. â Use a surge protector to prevent power surges or voltage spikes. 4 Press the On/Standby (power) button on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . The system starts. 5 See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. The display on the TV screen may not be optimized until after you set the display settings. n Set the volume to mid-level on the A V receiver and on the TV . DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60H z TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Surge Protector Line Conditioner AC IN 1 10-240V 5 0-60Hz AC W all Outlet HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER w Make sure you have followed all safety instructions for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , especially the impor tant AC power information. See âSafety Informationâ on page 17. Power On On/Standby
130 HP Digital Entertainment Center Syncing the Keyboard T est the keyboard after the operating system is loaded. Move the trackball to see if the cursor moves. If the keyboard does not operate, you must synchronize the keyboard with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o sync the keyboard: 1 After you have made all connections and have perfor med the initial startup procedure, make sure the HP Digital Entertainment Center is tur ned on. 2 Briefly press the Keyboard Connect button on the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel, behind the left door . The button will flash, indicating the system is ready to connect (sync) with the keyboard. 3 Press the red connect button once on the bottom of the keyboard. The front panel Keyboard Connect button flashes and stops, indicating a successful sync. Important: If you press the bu tton twice, you will need to repeat steps 1 through 4. 4 T est the keyboard. Move the trackball, and see if the cursor moves. 5 If the keyboard does not operate: a Check the batteries. b Repeat steps 1 through 4. KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1 394 MIC IN HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT
Initial Configuration 131 Initial Configuration Windows W elcome The system starts and displays the initial Microsoft ® Win do ws ® setup screen for the first power on only . Y ou will need a mouse and keyboard to navigate the screens. T o set up Windows for the first time: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the initial Microsoft Windows setup. 2 Click Next to set up your system. 3 Select your countr y/region and language in System Settings. Change is optional. Click Next . 4 Select your T ime Zone. Change is optional. Click Next . 5 Read the terms and condit ions of the End Users License Agreement and if you agree, accept the terms and conditions. Click Next . 6 Select Automatic Updates . Click Next . 7 Name your system. Click Next . 8 Select Finish . 9 A countdown displays. a After the countdown the screen goes blank. b Do not turn off your system du r in g t hi s o ne time setup process. This takes approximately 8 to 10 minutes. 10 Windows restarts automatically . 11 After the system restar ts, you will begin the Media Center first run. See âMedia Center First Runâ on page 132. Initial Setup W ait Time After you power up your system for the first time and complete the initial setup, you will see a welcome screen. This welcome screen will be displayed for one to three minutes, without any visible sign of system activity . During this period, your system is completing your account setup and should not be interrupted. Please do not power off while the welcome screen is displayed. After it completes, the desktop will be displayed and the Media Center Setup Wizard will automatically launch.
132 HP Digital Entertainment Center Media Center First Run The initial Media Center setup wizard consists of required setup and the optional setup. Required Setup The system displays the initial Media Center setup wizard for the first power on or unti l the Media Center setup is completed. The wizard includes steps for your network or broadband connections. Connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your wired network or broadband connections before you press the On/Standby button. T o set up Media Center for the first time: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the initial Media Center startup wizard. These instructions include choosing: â How Media Center connects to the Internet. â How to join a wireless network, if you have one. â How to join an existing (wired) network, if you have one. 2 The wizard sets up the required components. T o continue, set up optional components as required. See âOptional Setupâ on page 133. n When Media Center is open, you can press F1 on the keyboard to open Media Center Help.
Initial Configuration 133 Initial Configuration Optional Setup This procedure for optional components within the Media Center wizard can be completed at any time; you can define or change these settings using the Media Center settings. In this portion of the Media Center wizard, you will: â Configure tuners, TV signal, and T elevision Program Guide information. â Select and adjust Media Center display settings. â Set up speakers. â T each the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to control your cable TV or satellite receiver set-top box. T o set up optional components in Media Center: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the Media Center Optional Components startup wizard. 2 Confirm your countr y/region. 3 Set up the TV signal, manually or automatically . Make sure a TV source is connected. The wizard scans for signals if you select automatic. It also sets up a set-top box. 4 Set up and download the T elevision Program Guide. Y ou need your ZIP or postal code. 5 Choose and, if needed, adjust the display settings. 6 Choose the number of speakers you have. Y ou can also test the speakers. 7 If you selected 5.1 or 7.1 speakers, or if you are using S/PDIF (digital), you must set the DVD player speaker settings. See âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. n When Media Center is open, you can press F1 on the keyboard to open Media Center Help.
134 HP Digital Entertainment Center Using Media Center Setup Wizard for Optional Setup of your TV Display If your TV connects to the system using a composite or S-video connection, the Media Center Setup Wizard cannot make automatic adjustment of settings for your TV display . Instead of using the wizard for automatic adjustment, set the TV display by using the Windows Desktop Properties. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. This automatic adjustment is available during the Optional Setup, within the option Optimize how Media Center looks on your display . During the Media Center Setup Wizard, at the Optional Setup, do the following: 1 Select Optimize how Media Center looks on your display . 2 Select the display type for Identify Y our Display T ype . 3 Select the Connection T ype for your TV display . 4 Do the following for your type of video connection: Vid eo Ou t Option Action Composite or S-video â Click Next . â On the next screen, select Keep my current settings and continue . â Click Next . â See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. Do not select the option Preview Automatic Adjustment. DVI or VGA or Component (YPbPr) Continue using the wizard because the wizard can adjust your TV display . w If you choose the option Preview Automatic Adjustment, the screen may appear black or seem to halt for approximately 20 seconds. W ait until the wizard screen reappears, choose âDo not adjust any settingsâ, click Next, and then continue with the next step in this procedure .
Initial Configuration 135 Initial Configuration If Y our Connections Donâ t W ork Y ou can use Media Center wi zards to walk you through the connection process: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings . 3 Click one of the following topics: â General â TV â Pictures â Music â DVD â Messenger and Caller ID â Radio â Help 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. 5 If you cannot connect to the Internet, the wizard displays automatically . Adjusting the Fr ont Panel Display Brightness Y ou can adjust the brightness of the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel media info display . This setting does not control the brightness of the On/Standby (power) button or Media Center mode status LEDs. T o adjust the front panel display brightness: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Front Panel . 3 Change the front panel brightness. 4 Set adjustment for manual or automatic. Automatic changes the display brightness based on room light level. 5 Click Save .
136 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring Audio Y ou may have to optimize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center audio configuration to get the best sound on your audio system. Connecting Headphones Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center comes with a headphones connector (1/4 inch [6.5 mm]) on the front panel. Y ou can connect a mini plug adapter (sold separately) into the 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) plug to use 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack headphones. The Audio Out speakers are muted when you plug in the headphones, but S/PDIF does not mute. Connecting a Micr ophone Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center has a microphone connector on the front panel. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: âConnecting Headphonesâ on page 136 âConnecting a Microphoneâ on page 136 âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138 âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139
Initial Configuration 137 Initial Configuration Selecting recording devices T o select a sound recording device: 1 Click Start on the taskbar . 2 Choose Contr ol Panel . 3 Click Sounds and Audio Devices (or Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices ). The Sounds and Audio Devices window opens. 4 Click the Audio tab. The window opens. This window is easier to read on a monitor . Y ou can lower the display resolution to read the window . Y ou will need the keyboard and mouse. 5 In the Sound Recording area, click the Vo l u m e button, and then choose the source for sound recording. 6 Click OK . 7 Close the window . n Audio distortion may occur if recording volume is set too high.
138 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the V olume T o adjust speaker volume, use the: â Remote control â TV â AV r e c e i v e r â Buttons on the keyboard â V olume knob on the speakers â V olume knob on the subwoofer â V olume knob on the monitor (if connected) â V olume controls within a program, such as the volume buttons on the Media Center navigation bar or on the remote control â V olume icon on the taskbar Double-click and adjust the volume. Some applications may play back at low volume, even when the volume knob is turned to the maximum position. If this is the case, double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the taskbar and increase the volume. Locating the volume icon If you do not see the V olume icon on the taskbar: 1 Click Start , and then Control Panel . Click Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices , if it is available. 2 Double-click Sounds and Audio Devices . The Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window opens. This window is easier to read on a monitor . Y ou can lower the display resolution to read the window . Y ou will need the keyboard and mouse. 3 Click the Vo l u m e tab. Place a check in the Place volume icon in the taskbar check box. 4 Click Apply , and then click OK . The V olume icon appears in the taskbar . w Ensure that the mute box is not checked. n V olume cannot be contr olled from the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control if the S/PDIF digital audio out connects to your A V receiver . Control the sound from your A V receiver .
Initial Configuration 139 Initial Configuration Configuring Audio Output Y ou must adjust the audio settings in two places after you have installed and connected the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your audio system. Configure both the Media Center speaker settings and audio for the DVD player . The following table shows which procedures to perform for your audio system. If yo u set up speakers using the Media Center Optional Components wizard, then set up the audio for the DVD player only . Media Center speaker settings (TV Audio) DVD audio setting Procedure 2 (default) 2 speakers; Dolby Surround Compatible (default) Default, no audio output configuration required. 5.1 5.1 Change settings. See âConfigu ring audio for Media Centerâ on page 140 and âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. 7.1 7.1 Change settings. See âConfigu ring audio for Media Centerâ on page 140 and âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. Digital Audio S/PDIF on (default) Digital Audio S/PDIF off (default) Change settings. See âConfiguri ng audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. If you use digital audio, the Media Ce nter S/PDIF default setting is on, but the DVD Player S/PDIF default se tting is OFF . Y ou must change the DVD S/PDIF default setting to ON to hear all channels in DVD digital audio.
140 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring audio for Media Center T o configure multichannel audio output for Media Center audio: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings , General , Media Center Setup , and then Setup your Speakers. The Speaker Setup screen displays. 3 Click Next . 4 Under Specify how many speakers you have , select the speaker number that matches your system. For example, select 5.1 . Click Next . 5 Select Te s t . If you hear tones from all your speakers, click Next . If you do not hear tones from all your speakers, follow the onscreen instructions. 6 Click Finish . Configuring audio for the DVD player T o configure multichannel audio output for the Media Center DVD playback: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings , DVD, Audio , and then Configuration . 3 Set sound output to match your speaker system. For example, select 5.1 for analog audio connections. If you have a digital audio connection, select S/PDIF . 4 Click Save . n Reduce the volume level before changing channels. Exercise particular caution when changing from A TSC to NTSC channels. Y our analog NTSC channel audio levels may be noticeably higher than your SD/HDTV channel audio levels. The channel sound volume is controlled by the content pr ovider . n If your speaker configuration is not displayed, click the Sound Effect (speaker) icon in the desktop system tray .
Initial Configuration 141 Initial Configuration Configuring V ideo Y ou may have to optimize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center video configuration to get the best image on your TV/display screen. Configuring V ideo Output Y ou can configure your HP Digital Enter tainment Center video for dual-display . For instance, you can view the screen on your TV and your monitor if both are connected. Y ou can also set up additional displays. See âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 67 to connect your TV and monitor . If you have a multichannel sound system, and the broadcast is only 2-channel, you may not hear all the sound; you may need to chan ge your audio settings to 2.0/2.1. Then change the settings back for multichannel broadcasts. Video software can change periodically; check HP Support for updates. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number . Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: âConfiguring Video Outputâ on page 141 âDual screenâ on page 142 âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144 âFinding A TSC HDTV and Standard TV Channelsâ on page 151 âT uning the Desktop Displayâ on page 151 n Y our TV and monitor must be connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center before turning on the power to see the display on two screens.
142 HP Digital Entertainment Center Dual screen The HP Digital Entertainmen t Center can connect more than one display device (CRT monitor , flat panel monitor , TV , and so on) to the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . The display defaults to the mo nitor after turn on if you have two displays connected. Y ou must set up the TV manually . This is also called âcloningâ. The screen resolution may change if you switch to two displays. See âViewing the screen image on a second displayâ on page 142. Changing screens Once you have configured for dual screen, you can quickly change where the HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop appears by pressing Alt F5. (Press the Alt key and the F5 key on the keyboard at the same time.) Each time you press the Alt F5 key combination, the HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop appears on the next device. If Alt F5 does not work, restart the HP Digital Entertainment Center and tr y again. V iewing the screen image on a second display T o view your HP Digital Enter tainment Center screen image on a second TV or monitor: 1 Make sure the video and audio cables are connected before you turn on the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn on the TV . Press the Video/TV button on the TV remote control to select the Video input. 3 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. . Properties window
Initial Configuration 143 Initial Configuration 5 Ensure nView Display Settings is selected in the left side list. 6 Select Clone from the nV iew Display Mode drop down menu. 7 Select the Primar y and secondary displays from the drop down menu. 8 Click Apply . 9 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 10 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . Disabling the dual screen option When you want to disconnect the TV from the HP Digital Entertainment Center , you may need to disable the dual screen option to return yo ur HP Digital Enter tainment Center display to its original resolution. T o disable the TV or monitor dual screen option and view your HP Digital Entertainment Center image on the original display: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. 2 Ensure nView Display Settings is selected in the left side list. 3 Select Single Display from the nV iew Display Mode drop down menu. 4 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 5 Click the OK button to save changes, and then click OK again to close the Display Properties window . Disconnecting the TV T o disconnect the TV : 1 Disable the TV option. See âDisabling the dual screen optionâ on page 141. 2 T urn off the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 3 Remove the video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center Video Out and TV In.
144 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the Desktop Display Some tasks on the HP Digital Entertainment Center require that you leave Media Center and use the Windows XP desktop. Because Windows XP is not specifically designed for TV , some messages and dialogs on the desktop may be difficult to read on some TVs. Lowering the display resolution can make messages and dialogs easier to read by enlarging the text. This procedure is an example only and may var y depending on your TV/display type, supported for mats, and video out connections. Y ou may have to per form the procedure more than once to optimize the image. Y ou can adjust the display using: â The Media Center wizard. See âAdjusting the Display in Media Centerâ on page 145. Or â From the desktop. See âAdj usting the Display from the Desktopâ on page 149. w This setup procedure is advanced. Knowledge of video concepts and computer terms is helpful. Follow the steps carefully . Y our TV/ display may require settings and configurations different than those listed in the following procedures. n Y ou may have to per form this procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures.
Initial Configuration 145 Initial Configuration Adjusting the Display in Media Center Before you begin, verify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center and turned on, and ensure that your TV screen is set to normal mode (not letter-box, wide, or re-sized). T o adjust the video settings in Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Video Settings . 3 Click Display/Connection Wizard . 4 V erify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainm ent Center and tur ned on. Check the boxes. Click Next . n Use the arrow keys to select Next if the lower buttons are not visible.
146 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5 V erify the TV/display type. Click Next . 6 V e rify the video out connection type. As required, select the correct connection to match the back panel, by clicking on a video out connector such as video (composite), S-video, component video, VGA or DVI. Click Next . Flat panel display shown. Component video output shown.
Initial Configuration 147 Initial Configuration 7 Select the screen resolution definition type that is supported by your TV/display . Click Next . This screen may var y or not appear , depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 8 V erify that the settings are correct. Click Preview . The changed video settings display . Y our settings may vary . Y our settings may vary .
148 HP Digital Entertainment Center 9 Click Ye s to apply the settings. The screen may flicker for a few seconds while the settings change. If the new setting is not co rrect, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 10 Click Finish . DVD Playback Y ou may have to per form the Adjusting the Desktop Display procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures. T o play a commercial DVD video in component video, the resolution format must be set to 480i or 480p. The DVD will not play after it is inserted into the drive, and you may see an error message when you tr y to play the DVD in component video and the resolution format is set above 480i or 480p. T o play a commercial DVD video, in component video, in Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Video Settings . 3 Click DVD Mode (480p) . (Select this mode only if your TV supports 480p mode.) 4 After playing the commercial DVD video in component video, perfor m the Adjusting the Desktop Display procedure to return the desktop image and Media Center to a higher resolution format. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. n Y ou may also need to per form the HDTV Overscan procedure, depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. n Y ou may have to per form the âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures.
Initial Configuration 149 Initial Configuration Adjusting the Display fr om the Desktop Y ou can also use the following procedures to adjust the TV video settings. These procedures are examples only and may var y depending on your TV/display type, supported for mats, and video out connections. Y ou may have to perfor m the procedure more than once to optimize the image. Y ou can use this window to adjust the TV video image in composite, S-video, or component video out. This window is not available for single di splays in DVI or VGA video out. Use the Media Center HP Settings wizard to adjust these displays. Before you begin, verify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center and turned on, and ensure that your TV screen is set to normal mode (not letter-box, wide or re-sized). T o adjust the video settings from the Windows desktop: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display and the TV/display in the dialog box. The GeForce window opens. 2 Select TV Settings from the left side list. 3 Select the Signal format to a type that is supported by your TV/display . (For commercial DVD playback in component video, select: 480i or 480p.) 4 Click Apply (or click OK to save changes). 5 Perform HDTV Overscan Configuration, as required. See âHDTV Overscan Config urationâ on page 150. The HDTV Overscan Configuration window may open, depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 6 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. The screen may flicker for a few seconds while the settings change. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. If the new setting is not correct, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 7 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . n If the lower buttons are not visible, right-click the top bar and select move to move the window and access the buttons.
150 HP Digital Entertainment Center HDTV Overscan Configuration T o use underscan to show the entire Windows desktop: 1 Right click on the desktop, select nVidia Display , and click HDTV Overscan Configuration in the dialog box. The HDTV Overscan Configuration window opens. This screen may var y or not appear , depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 2 Select Use underscan to show the entire Windows desktop . 3 Click Apply (or click OK to save the changes). 4 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. If the new setting is not correct, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 5 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . Y ou cannot use HDTV Overscan Configuration for 480i or 480p.
Initial Configuration 151 Initial Configuration Finding A TSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels (Select models only) After you complete the Media Center and Digital TV setup wizards and then download your TV Program Guide, the Media Center TV Program Guide may display incorrect A TSC DTV channels. Some channels may have an incorrect channel number and other channels may not be displayed at all. These HDTV channels may be available in your area, but they may not be listed in the Media Center TV Program Guide. A more complete A TSC TV channel guide may be available from third party providers, such as Titan TV . For more information, see the Media Center Online Spotlight. T o view or record HDTV content, you need an HP Digital Entertainment Center with A TSC tuner (included) and UHF/VHF antenna (sold separately). T uning the Desktop Display The HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop default screen resolution is 800 by 600 pixels. In the default format, the Windows desktop on your TV/display screen may show a black border around it. Y ou may also see that the video image is larger than your TV/display (overscan). n Broadcasters sometimes use two channels: one for Standard TV (NTSC) and one for HDTV (A TSC DTV). An HDTV channel can broadcast several programs at the same time. w Only advanced users should attempt to perform this procedure. If you cannot see a screen image, go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for detailed information on advanced video setup.
152 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the V ideo Image T o optimize the HP Digital Enter tainment Center video image so it best fits your TV screen, do the following: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. Properties window 2 Select Screen resolutions and refresh rates from the left side list. Adjust the Screen resolution and Monitor settings as required. 3 Click Apply .
Initial Configuration 153 Initial Configuration 4 Click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 5 Select Color Correction from the left side list. Adjust the brightness and contrast slider bars as required. 6 Click Apply . 7 Click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 8 Close the Properties window .
154 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring the System Y ou can customize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center system settings. Configuring the Keyboard Buttons Y ou can configure some of your HP Digital Enter tainment Center shortcut keyboard buttons. 1 Click Start on the taskbar , choose Contr ol Panel , and then click Printers and Other Hardware , if it is available. 2 Double-click Keyboard . 3 In the Keyboard Properties window that opens, click the Buttons tab. 4 Double-click the button you want to change. 5 Choose the button capability from the drop-down list. Enter the Display label and Address information. â For a W eb site, enter the complete W eb site URL in the Address box. Example: http://www .hp.com/suppor t 6 Click OK . 7 On the Buttons tab, click Apply . Repeat steps 4 through 6 for other buttons. 8 Click OK when you are finished. See: âConfiguring the Keyboard Buttonsâ on page 154 âRegistering with HPâ on page 155 âSetting Up Virus Protectionâ on page 155 âT ransferring Infor mation from Y our Old PC to Y our HP Digital Entertainment Centerâ on page 155 âInstalling Softwareâ on page 156 âUtility Programsâ on page 156
Initial Configuration 155 Initial Configuration Registering with HP T o register with HP to receive changes, updates, and support: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Suppor t , and then Register Now . 3 Follow onscreen instructions, using the keyboard and trackball. Y ou can also register with HP in the following ways: â Double-click the registration icon on your desktop, and follow onscreen instructions. â Register online at: http://register .hp.com Setting Up V irus Pr otection Y ou should use virus protection if you connect to the Internet. Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide to set up the virus protection software. T ransferring Information from Y our Old PC to Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center See the built-in Microsoft Windows Help and Support Center; search for transfer wizard and select the over view article, Files and Settings T ransfer Wizard Overview . This information describes a Microsoft solution for moving your files to your new HP Digital Entertainment Center .
156 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installing Software After you turn on the HP Digi tal Enter tainment Center the first time and then restart it, you can install any additional software programs that came on CDs or DVDs included in the HP Digital Entertainment Center box (select models only). Y ou may wish to install additional software programs or hardware devices on your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Restart the HP Digital Enter tainment Center after installation. Choose software that is compatible with your HP Digital Entertainment Center; check the operating system, memor y , and other requirements listed for the new software for compatibility with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Install the new software according to the directions provided by the software manufacturer . Check the manufacturerâ s documentation or customer ser vice information for help if you need it. Utility Pr ograms HP Settings HP provides special utility programs in the HP Digital Entertainment Center Media Center that configure the desktop display , adjust front panel brightness, and setup the HP Personal Media Drive. T o use Media Center utility programs: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms and then HP Settings . 3 Select a program or folder: â DVD â Front Panel â HP Media Drive â Video Settings
Initial Configuration 157 Initial Configuration System utilities HP provides special utility programs in the PC Help & T ools folder that display support infor mation and initiate Application or System Recover y . T o use utility programs: 1 Click Start , choose All Programs , and then PC Help & T ools . 2 Select a program or folder: â HP Application Recover y â HP Support Infor mation â HP PC System Recover y â PC Doctor â Safety and Comfort Guide â System Restore
158 HP Digital Entertainment Center
T roubleshooting T roubleshooting 159 T r oubleshooting This section contains possible solutions for some problems you may be experiencing with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Chapter Contents: T o solve audio problems, see âAudioâ on page 160. T o solve video problems, see âVideoâ on page 162. T o solve system problems, see âSystemâ on page 164. For other sources of information, see âGetting Helpâ on page 170.
160 HP Digital Entertainment Center Pr oblems and Solutions Audio Find the description that most closely matches your audio problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution I donâ t have sound from my speakers. â Use active, powered speakers or speakers with an amplifier . â V erify sound cable connections. â Check V olume and Mute settings. See âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138. â Reconfigure the software for surround soun d. See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. â Reinstall the sound card drivers by using Application Recover y . See the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Enter tainment Center . I have low volume sound from my speakers. â Check volume and mute settings. See âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138. â Some programs may result in low volume, even when the volume setting within the program is turned to the maximum position . If this is the case, double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the taskbar and increase volume. My TV audio volume increases or decreases when I change channels. Reduce the volume level before changing ch annels. Exercise par ticular caution when changing from A TSC to NTSC channels. Y o ur analog NTSC channel audio levels may be noticeably higher than your SD/HDT V channel audio levels. The channel sound volume is controlled by the content provider .
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 161 T roubleshooting The HP Digital Entertainment Center doesnâ t make any sound. â Check that the A V receiver or powered sp eakers are tur ned on and are set to the proper input. â Increase the volume on the A V receiver or the HP Digital Enter tainment Center remote control. â Press the Mute button on the HP Digital Entertainment Center keyboard or on the remote control to see if the Mute feature is turned on. â Use the keyboard controls to increase the volume. â Click the Vo l u m e icon on the Windows taskbar . Increase the volume, and make sure the Mute box is not checked. â Double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the Windows taskbar . The Play Control window opens. Make sure none of the Mute chec k boxes are selected. Adjust the volume slide bars to increase volume. â If your speakers have a Power button, check whether it is turned on and whether the power supply is connected to the power source. â Check the speaker connections. â Remove any connected headphones. Surround sound isnâ t working. See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. Problem Solution
162 HP Digital Entertainment Center Vi d e o Find the description that most closely matches your problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution I am using a TV with the HP Digital Entertainment Center , but I cannot see anything. â Check that the correct input source is selected on the TV . â Check that the TV is connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64. â Check that the TV Out image is enabled. See âConfiguring Vi deoâ on page 141. I cannot see anything on the TV . I can hear it, though. â If the Video Output S-video and composite connections are not connected to a TV or Video Input when the HP Digital Entert ainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatica lly . Y ou must turn off, by pressing and holding down the On/Standby (power) butto n for 4 seconds, and restart your HP Digital Entertainment Center to ensure Vi deo Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . â Check your input switches. My HDTV displays a distorted screen instead of a blank screen (blue or dark). The screen may be cropped or display dark borders. â Refer to http://www .hp.com/suppor t for additional information on adjusting the display or updating the drivers. â If you see a blank screen, you cannot perf or m recover y or certain activities with DVI. Change your Video Out connection to VGA or S-video, recover your system, and then reconnect the DVI connection. â Connect a monitor to your HP Digital Ente r tainment Center . See âV ideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69. My screen flickers during startup. If your TV is connected with S-video or composite video out connection, the screen may flicker/flash during power-on to windows desktop process. W ait; the screen should display normally after the desktop displays. The HP Digital Entertainment Center doesnâ t recognize my digital video camera. See âRecognizing the digital video camcorderâ on page 111.
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 163 T roubleshooting My remote control doesnâ t work. â Check that the remote control indicator li ght on the remote lights up when you press a button. If it does not, replace the batteries. â Make sure that the batteries for the re mote control are charged and installed correctly . â Make sure the front of the remote sensor on the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not blocked (behind display window). â Point the remote control at the HP Digita l Entert ainment Center (not at the TV) within a 45-degree angle range, and less than 26 feet (8 meters) away . â If a pressed key repeats itself (or sticks), tr y altering the lighting conditions in the room or moving the location of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Press the Enter button on the remote control after changing a channel. â Point the remote control toward the remote sensor , and press a button. A faint red light should appear on the remote sensor . If the light appears, then the problem is probably in the Media Center soft ware. Close Media Center , restart the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and then open Media Center again. â If the remote control works in Media Cent er but not when changing channels, you need to reconfigure the Media Center soft ware settings for the cable set-top box or satellite receiver . Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . My remote sensor is not receiving a signal from the remote control. If a faint red light does not appear when you point the remote control at the front panel remote sensor and press a button, tr y the following: â Check that the remote control indicator li ght on the remote lights up when you press a button. If it does not, replace the batteries. Or 1 Click Start on the desktop, right-click My Computer , and then select Properties . 2 Click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager . 3 Click the plus ( ) sign next to Universal Serial Bus Controllers. 4 If the eHome Infrared Receiver is listed under Universal Serial Bus Controllers, Windows is properly detecting the IR receiver . If it is not listed, go to the next step. 5 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter . Remove all external USB devices. Remove the power cord for 30 seconds. Then reconnect external devices and power . Repeat steps 1â4. Problem Solution
164 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Find the description that most closely matches your problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution My HP Digital Entertainment Center wonâ t turn on at all. â When you press the On button on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center , the following events should happen: a The HP On/Standby (power) button should light and the front display should light up. b The hard disk drive and fans spin. c The HP Digital Entertainment Center makes one beep, indicating it is operating properly . â If the HP Digital Entertainment Cent er doesnât go through the previous procedure, check the following: a The power cord and all cables are securely plugged into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . b The power cord is plugged into a gr ounded outlet. Check to see whether the outlet works by plugging another item into it. c Look inside the rear fan. If you see a green LED, then AC power is available. d The TV or monitor is connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , plugged in, and turned on. e Make sure that the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not too hot, and that vents are not blocked. I installed a new printer or other device, and it wonâ t work. â Be sure that you installed the device drivers that came with the new device. â Y ou may need an updated driver for Windows XP . For non-HP peripherals, contact the vendor directly . For HP peripherals, visit the HP W e b site. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for details.
T roubleshooting 165 T roubleshooting The HP Digital Entertainment Center (or part of it) doesnât seem to be working. â The HP Digital Entertainment Center is in standby mode (the On button power indicator light is solid amber). Press the Standby button on the keyboard or the Standby button on the remote control to turn on the unit. â Make sure the keyboard syncs with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. â T r y restar ting the HP Digital En ter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . â If the HP Digital Entertainment Center shows no response to mouse or keyboard actions, reset the HP Digital Entertainment Center: a Press and hold the On button for more than 4 seconds until the HP Digital Entertainment Center tur ns off. b W ait a few seconds, and turn the HP Digital Entertainment Center back on. â A software program, software driver , or the operating system software may be corrupted, erased, or damaged. Y ou can use Application Recover y or System Recover y to reinstall the software. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Itâ s possible that a voltage spike, po wer outage, or brownout has occurred. Symptoms of voltage spikes include a flickering video display , unexpected HP Digital Entertainment Center star tups, and the HP Digital Entertainment Center not responding to your command s. A voltage spike can occasionally corrupt or destroy files, so it is a go od idea to consistently make backup copies of your data files. Prevent voltage spikes by installing a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the HP Digital Entertainment Center power cord. Problem Solution n Using the On button to reset the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not recommended and should be used only as a last resort.
166 HP Digital Entertainment Center When I push one of the special or multimedia buttons on the keyboard, nothing happens. â Check that the standard keyboard keys and mouse work properly . Or â Check the button configuration. T o configure the button: 1 Click Start on the taskbar , and then click Control Panel . 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware , if it is available. 3 Double-click Keyboard . 4 In the Keyboard Properties window that opens, click the Buttons tab. 5 Double-click the button you want to ch ange. The button configuration window opens. 6 Choose the button capability from the drop-down list. Enter the Display label and the Address information. (For a W eb site, enter the complete W eb site URL in the Address box.) 7 Click OK and then on the Buttons tab, click Apply . 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each button you want to configure. 9 Click OK when you are finished configuring the keyboard. My keyboard or the trackball doesnâ t work even though the HP Digital Entertainment Center and TV or monitor seem to work. â Make sure the keyboard syncs with th e HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. â T r y restar ting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . Problem Solution
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 167 T roubleshooting The TV or monitor doesnâ t work, even though the HP Digital Entertainment Center appears to. â Make sure the TV or monitor is turned on â it has its own Power button. â Make sure the proper TV or monitor input is selected. â Check the cable connection between the monitor and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . The cable connecto rs must be pushed in all the way prior to powering on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Ensure that the cables to your monitor and your TV connect to the Video Out connectors on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Make sure the monitor power cord is plugged into a grounded outlet. Check to see whether the outlet works by pluggi ng another item into it. (If the light on the front of the monitor is li t, the monitor is getting power .) â T r y restar ting the HP Digital En ter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . â Adjust the brightness and contra st controls on the monitor . My software stopped working. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center to reinstall a softwa re program. If your program came on a CD, follow the instructions that came with the software to reinstall it. I cannot remove a CD or DVD. Y ou cannot remove a CD or DVD after yo u have tur ned off the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T urn on the HP Di gital Entertainment Center , and press the Eject button to extend the tray . Problem Solution
168 HP Digital Entertainment Center The memory card reader wonâ t read my memory cards. â The memor y card reader is a device th at uses the Safely Remove Hardware task. This appears as a Windows system tray icon next to the time. Do not click Stop in the Safely Remove Hardware window . If you do click Stop , the drive is disconnected. If this happens, restart the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . â Do n ot i ns er t o r r em o ve m em or y ca r ds w he n t he i n- us e li gh t is f la sh i ng . T o do so may cause data loss, or it may permanently damage the card reader . â Format a memor y card before you use it. Click Star t , and then click My Computer . Under Removable Storage, right-click the memor y card icon and select Format . Click Star t . Click OK on the Format Complete W indow , and then click Close to finish. â Some cards have a read/write or secu rity switch on the card. Make sure the read/write switch is set to W rite Enabled before attempting to write data to it. â Make sure the amount of data you ar e storing has not exceeded the storage limit of the card. â Make sure the memor y card is one of the supported types: CompactFlash I/II and Microdrive, Memor y Stick, Memor y Stick Pro, MultiMedia, Secure Digital, SmartMedia, or /xD. â Make sure the memor y card is fully inser ted into the correct slot. â Remove the memor y card when the light is not flashing, and shine a flashlight into the empty slot. If any of the pins are bent, have the HP Digital Entertainment Center ser viced if a pin is touching another pin. â Inspect the ends of the memor y cards fo r dirt or material closing a hole or spoiling a metal contact. Clean the cont acts with a lint-free cloth and small amounts of isopropyl alcohol. Replace the memor y card if necessar y . My video is experiencing errors. â Y our file may be corrupt or in an unsu pported format. Open the video file in a video editor such as WinDVD Creato r , and then resave the file in a supported for mat. â There may be a problem with the codec. For more information, look in Windows Media Player Help, and then search for codec . Codec errors are occurring when I play certain files. Codec is an abbreviation for compressor-decompressor . A codec is software or hardware used to compress and decompress digital media. If you get a codec error when playing an audio file, open the file in Windows Media Player . Configure Windows Media Player to automatically download codecs. Y ou must be connected to the Internet to download the codec file. Problem Solution
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 169 T roubleshooting My DVD wonâ t play . â Y ou can put data files on a DVD to stor e them or transfer them to another HP Digital Entertainment Center . However , data files on a DVD do not play in a DVD player . Rerecord your files to a fi le format that can be read by some DVD players. â If you are using component video output, you may need to change the configuration. See âComponent Vide o Settingsâ on page 60. Refer to http://www .hp.com/suppor t for additional information on using component video. â Check your DVD countr y/region. My DVD wonâ t play a DVD audio disk. This format is not suppor ted by the DVD player . I keep running out of disk space. â Burn some big files to DVD and remove them from your hard disk drive. â Upgrade your hard disk drive. The hard disk drive is user replaceable. I am getting disk errors. â Run disk recover y . â Replace your hard disk drive. The hard disk drive is user replaceable. My music files donâ t appear in the Media Library . â Make sure you use Windows Media Player to add your music files to the Media Librar y . â Check whether the Windows Media Player setting for access rights of other applications is set to No access . I t mus t be s et to Read only or Full access for your music files to appear . Refer to Windows Media Player Help for more information â Use supported audio file for mats. Refer to the HP T unes librar y . Problem Solution n If you need more information about using or troubleshooting Media Center , refer to the Media Center online Help or Help and Support in the Star t menu.
170 HP Digital Entertainment Center Getting Help Help and Suppor t Center For help, press the Help button on your keyboard, or click Start on the taskbar and select Help and Support . The Help and Support Center is onscreen Help information about your HP Digital Enter tainment Center . Here you can find: â Links to reinstall drivers. â Access to technical support options. â Answers to commonly asked questions about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o open the Help and Suppor t Center: 1 Press the Help button on your keyboard (the ? button). Or Start Media Center . Click the Help ( ? ) icon at the top left of the screen. Or Click Start on the taskbar , and click Help and Support . HP Suppor t HP Support provides impor tant support infor mation about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Here you can find: â Y our product number , model number , and serial number . â Registration information and link (monitor , keyboard, and mouse recommended). â Where to find more information about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . â An HP Digital Entertainment Center hardware test. â How to contact HP . T o open HP Suppor t: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , and then HP Support . 3 Select a program or folder: â Register Now â Learn More â Te s t H a r d w a r e â Contact HP
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 171 T roubleshooting W arranty and Support Guide See the HP Digital Entertainment Center W arranty and Support Guide , included with the documentation, for detailed information on: â HP W eb site Suppor t addresses â HP Support telephone numbers â HP Customer Care information â HP W eb site Online Guide addresses â Application and System Recover y programs â The terms of your HP limited warranty â License information HP W eb Site Suppor t The HP W eb site provides: â Supplemental information about the HP Digital Entertainment Center and products â HP Support contact information â Software updates â Software patches â Online Information and technical suppor t for your HP Digital Entertainment Center â Online manuals for your HP Digital Entertainment Center T o use the HP W eb site: 1 Connect to the Internet: Open your W eb browser . Or Press Connect on your keyboard. 2 Access the HP Support W eb site. T ype http://www .hp.com/suppor t into the W eb browser address box. Press Enter . 3 Select your countr y/region from the drop-down list. Press the arrow button next to the list. 4 Use the W eb site addresses listed in the W arranty and Support Guide for infor mation about your HP Digital Entertainment Center and your technical support needs.
172 HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Customer Care Y ou can get help over the telephone from HP . When you call HP Customer Care, have your model number and serial number available. See the keyboard or the W arranty and Support Guide for the support telephone numbers. Online Guides Y ou can find online guides and information for your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o view online manuals for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , go to the Support W eb address that is listed in the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center , and then search for your product name and number . Online manuals are associated with specific HP Digital Entertainment Center model numbers. Some models may not have online manuals. Application and System Recover y Pr ograms The HP Digital Entertainment Center uses the operating system and installed software programs during normal operation. If your HP Digita l Entertainment Center works improperly or stops because of the software, you may be able to repair it by restarting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center , using System Restore, or using other methods including the System Recover y programs. Recover y discs (DVDs) are included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center system. Y ou need recovery discs for some repairs that use the system recover y programs. For instructions on using recover y discs, repairing and recovering your software, and more information, refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Problems with software programs may be caused by corruption or damage to an individual program (application or software driver ) or to part of the operating system software.
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 173 Updates fr om HP HP may send updated information or patches to your desktop (not available in all countries/regions). Y ou must be connected to the Internet to receive these updates. If you have turned off the Updates from HP feature, you will not receive these updates. T o turn updates back on: 1 Click Start , choose All Programs , and then HP Digital Entertainment Center Help & T ools . 2 Click Updates fr om HP , and then click Re-enable Updates from HP . Micr osoft W eb Site Search the Microsoft W eb site ( http://www .suppor t.microsoft.com ) for Knowledge Base articles and updates on Microsoft ® Win do ws ® XP Media Center Edition 2004. Y ou can also use the Online Spotlight link to get to the Microsoft Windows XP Media Center W eb site. T o get the latest news and information about your Microsoft Windows XP Media Center program: 1 Press the Media Center button on your remote control. 2 Select Online Spotlight from the Media Center Start menu.
174 HP Digital Entertainment Center
Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 175 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Impor tant Information About Recorded TV Pr ograms When you replace the hard disk drive, you lose any files or software that you created, saved, or installed on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Because of this, you also lose a special code that Micros oft includes in the files of recorded TV programs. Without the code, Media Center cannot play TV programs previously recorded to disk or copied to DVD or to other media. For more information about safeguarding your recorded TV programs, refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . Pr ocedure Before you begin Replace the internal hard disk drive only if it has failed. Do not replace the internal hard disk drive until HP support has diagnosed it as the point of failure. HP recommends to upgrade hard disk drive capacity using the HP Personal Media Drive. Before you begin to replace the internal hard disk drive: 1 Make sure you have the recover y discs (DVDs) included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center system. 2 Back up your data to the Personal Media Drive or burn it to DVD. 3 Close Media Center and all other programs that may be accessing the hard disk drive. 4 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 Disconnect the power cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 6 Disconnect all other cables from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . w Only advanced users should attempt to perform this procedure.
176 HP Digital Entertainment Center Removal T o remove the internal hard disk drive: 1 T urn the HP Digital Entertainment Center upside down. 2 Remove the hard disk drive cover from the chassis. After loosening the screw , sl ide the hard disk drive in the direction of the screw . 3 Lift up the hard disk drive from the chassis. 4 Disconnect the hard disk drive cables. 5 Remove the hard disk drive screws. A B A B
Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 177 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Replacement T o replace the internal hard disk drive: 1 Replace the old hard disk drive with the new hard disk drive. 2 Replace the hard disk drive screws. T ighten the screws an additional half-turn only after the screws contact the rubber washer . 3 Reconnect the hard disk drive cables. 4 Place the hard disk drive into the chassis. Position the metal tabs. 5 Replace the hard disk drive cover on the chassis. A B A B
178 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 T urn the HP Digital Entertainment Center right side up. 7 Reconnect the power cable and all other cables to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 8 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 9 T est the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. 10 Recover your system using the recover y disk. 11 Restore your data.
Index Index 179 Index Numerics 1/4 inch headphones 136 1394 7, 109 2.0 multichannel audio system 41 2.1 Home Stereo Installation 42 2.1 home stereo installation 41, 42 2.1 multichannel audio system 42 2.1 powered speaker 49 4.1 Home Theater Audio 43 4.1 powered speaker 50 5.1 home theater audio 44 5.1 multichannel audio system 44 5.1 powered speaker 51 5/4.1 home audio installation 43 7.1 Home Theater Audio 45 7.1 multichannel audio system 45 7.1 powered speaker 52 802.11 b/g 117 9-in-1 card readers 5 A active (powered) speakers 48 Additional equipment 32 adjusting desktop display resolution 144 front panel brightness 135 speaker volume 138 Adjusting the Volume 138 Alt F5 142 Analog Camcorder 112 Antenna (ATSC) 81 Antenna (NTSC and ATSC) 82 Antenna Connection 80 for FM radio 56 antennaweb.org 73 Application and System Recovery 172 Application Recovery 157 ATSC 73, 74 antenna 73 from VHF/UHF antenna 78 HDTV Channels 151 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out 6 audio configuration 136 Audio Connection Typical 38 audio files codec errors 168 do not appear in Media Library 169 Audio In connection 55 Audio Output 139 Audio Problems and Solutions 160 audio settings 139 Audio system equipment 32 Audio/Video flow 21 B back panel location of connections 6 system diagram 22 video connector locations 76 Basic Setup 27 Basic TV audio setup (2.0) 39 batteries 13 installing in keyboard 128 installing in remote control 16 replacing in keyboard 13 type for keyboard 13 for remote control 16 before you start additional items necessary 32 cables you may need 31 components supplied 29 safety information 17 Benefits 2 Brightness 135 brightness, adjusting front panel display 135 broadband Internet 113 Broadband Internet equipment 32 button functions, remote control 14 buttons configuring keyboard 154
180 HP Digital Entertainment Center C Cabinet back 26 Cabinet Front 25 Cable (NTSC) and UHF Antenna (ATSC) 83 cable box 71 cable modem 119, 120 cable modem, connecting 119 Cable Only (NTSC) 88 cable receiver dual tuner option 72 setting up using Media Center 132 Cable/Antenna In 8 cables included 30 not included 31 Camcorder 104 camcorders 101 camera connecting digital still 121 connecting digital video 109 capture 112 Center/Subwoofer 6 Changing screens 142 clearances, space for HP Digital Entertainment Center 28 cloning 142 Coaxial Splitter 30 codec errors 168 Color Correction 153 combination of Video 69 combinations 69 CompactFlash I/II 5 component video 60 Component Video Out 7 Component Video Settings 60 Composite 7 composite 75 Configuring Audio 136 for Media Center 140 for the DVD player 140 configuring Media Center audio settings 139 for cable or satellite receiver 132 for DVD player 140 for multichannel audio 140 for optional display 133 for your speaker setup 133 for your TV tuner and program guide 133 front panel display brightness 135 selecting recording devices 137 Configuring the Keyboard Buttons 154 Configuring the System 154 Configuring Video 141 Configuring Video Output and Source 141 Connecting headphones 136 TV Audio 39 VCRs 101 connecting 2.0 speaker system 41 2.1 speaker system with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 speaker system with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 speaker system with digital input on AV receiver 46 with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 speaker system with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 antenna, broadcast TV 80, 81, 82 cable boxes, two 86, 91 digital audio to AV receiver 46 DSL/cable modem 119 DVD player 103
Index 181 Index microphone 136 monitor speakers 54 powered speakers 48 router, to Internet through 119 satellite receiver, one 93 satellite receivers 95 tape player using Audio In connections 55 TV displays 58 TV to watch one channel and record on another 72 VCR with direct connections 105 video analog camera 112 video digital camera 109 video, overview 104 Connections 20 system diagram 22 Connections Donât Work 135 connector locations for audio output 34 for video output 59 on back panel 6 on front panel 3 contacting HP Customer Care by telephone 172 using the Web 171 Customer Care 172 D data files on DVDs, troubleshooting 169 Desktop Display 151 Desktop resolution 60 Device Manager 111 Digital 5.1 multichannel audio system 47 digital audio cable 46 digital audio system 53 digital audio, 5.1 supported formats 46 Digital home theater audio 46 Digital powered speaker 53 Digital Speakers 53 connecting 53 Digital Still Camera 121, 122 connection 121 Digital TV for Windows 74 Digital Video Camcorder 109 back panel 110 front panel 110 Digital Video Camera 122 Digital Video Out 7 Disabling the dual screen option 143 disconnect the TV 143 Display Overview 61 Display/video configuration 63 documentation how to find HP support information 171 how to find online manuals 172 Dolby Digital 46 DSL 119, 120 connecting 119 order of powerup 17 DTS Digital encoded audio 46 DTV 74 channels 151 dual displays 61 configuring with Media Center 133 disabling 143 switching between 142 Dual-tuner 72 DVD audio setting 139 DVD playback 60 DVD player 103 configuring audio settings 139 configuring using Media Center 140 location of connectors 103 troubleshooting 169 use with data files 169 DVD recovery discs 29 DVI 7 E error messages codec error when playing certain files 168 from hard drive 169 Ethernet 7 External hard disk drive 122
182 HP Digital Entertainment Center F FAQs, how to find 170 Fast Ethernet (100BaseT) 116 feature overview 2 Finding ATSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels 151 FireWire (IEEE 1394) 109 FireWire input-output, lo cation on front panel 4 flashlight 99 FM Antenna, connecting 56 FM radio antenna 56 Found New Hardware 121 Front 3, 6 Front Panel 3, 23, 156 Front Panel Display Brightness 135 front panel, adjusting display brightness 135 G Getting Help 170 Gigabit Ethernet (1000BaseT) 116 Guide, Television Program 151 H hard drive connecting HP Personal Media Drive 123 location on front panel 3 replacing 175, 176, 177 running out of disk space 169 troubleshooting 169 Hardware 111 hardware test, for HP Digital Entertainment Center 170 HDTV 74 antenna 73, 81 channels 75 HDTV (ATSC) In 8 HDTV and standard signal source â TV antenna 82 HDTV/SDTV Ant. In 77 headphones 136 location of output on front panel 4 help how to find 170 Microsoft Web site 173 Help and Support Center 170 High definition capable plasma, LCD, or HDTV display 58 high-definition TV 73 how to configure Media Center for cable or satellite receiver 132 for optional display 133 for your speaker setup 133 for your TV tuner and program guide 133 how to connect 2.0 speaker system 41 2.1 speaker system with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 speaker system with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 speaker system with digital input on AV receiver 46 with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 speaker system with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 broadcast antenna 80, 81, 82 cable boxes, two 86, 91 camera, digital still 121 camera, digital video 109 digital speakers 53 DSL/Cable modem 119 DVD player 103 FM radio 56 HP personal media drive 124 monitor speakers 54 powered speakers 48 remote IR 99 router, to a LAN through 120 satellite receiver, one 93 satellite receivers, two 95 USB devices 122 VCR 105
Index 183 Index how to find FAQs 170 help 170 HP Digital Entertainment Center hardware test 170 utility programs 156 how to obtain updates 173 how to register for updates 155 how to replace batteries in keyboard 13 batteries in remote control 16 hard drive 175, 176, 177 how to switch inputs using your monitor 69 how to switch between audio and video using your monitor 68 using your receiver 66 using your TV 64 how to switch between dual displays 142 how to synchronize, the keyboard 130 how to transfer PC data to HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 HP Application Recovery 172 HP Customer Care 172 contacting by telephone 172 HP Digital Entertainment Center box contents 29 recovery after a power outage 165 reset procedure 165 support for 170 HP Help and Support Center 170 HP Media Drive 124, 156 HP Personal Media Drive 123 automatic on and off feature 123 disconnecting 125 installing 124 running the media drive utility 124 utility 124 HP Settings 156 HP Support 170 HP Web site 171 HP Web Site Support 171 I Indicator light 10 Infrared Transmitter 97 Infrared Transmitter cable 99 Infrared Transmitter connection (one set-top box) 98 Infrared Transmitter connection (two set-top boxes) 98 Infrared Transmitter Installation 99 Infrared Transmitter sensor 99 Initial Configuration 127 initial Microsoft Windows setup screen 131 Initial Setup Wait Time 131 Installation Overview 19 installing additional software and devices 156 batteries in keyboard 16 batteries in remote control 128 HP Personal Media Drive 124 software 156 internal splitter 76 Internet connecting DSL/cable modem 119 connecting through a router 120 connection 117 service contract 117 typical configurations 116 iPod 122 IR Blaster 97 irrecoverable data loss ii K keyboard 122 batteries (Initial) 128 buttons 154 configuring buttons 154 function keys 10 replacing batteries 13 synchronizing 130, 166 troubleshooting 130, 166 Keyboard Connect button 12, 130
184 HP Digital Entertainment Center L LAN 117, 120 LED 5 light-emitting diode (LED) 5 location 24 M Media Center adjusting desktop display resolution 144 configuring audio settings 139 dual displays option disabling 143 enabling 142 Microsoft Web site 173 obtaining update information 173 registering for updates 155 testing system connections 135 utility programs 156 viewing on a second display 142 Media Center First Run 132 Media Center Setup Wizard 134 Media Center speaker settings 139 Media Center TV Program Guide 151 Media Center wizard 135 Media Library music files not displaying 169 troubleshooting 169 memory card reader location of slots on front panel 5 troubleshooting 168 Memory Stick (MS) 5 Microdrive 5 microphone 136 connecting 136 location of inputs on front panel 4 Microsoft Web site 173 information about Media Center 173 microsoft.com 74 mixer 55 MMC/SD 5 monitor 58 connecting 69 troubleshooting 167 Monitor Out 68 monitor speakers 54 Mouse 122 Mouse button 10 moving your files 155 MP3 player 122 MS/MS-Pro 5 MultiMediaCard 5 multiple audio/video inputs 64 N network 113 connections 116 connections supported 113 connectors location on back panel 115 on back panel 114 equipment 113 no picture 64 notes ii NTSC 72, 74 analog cable 78 cable 79 from VHF/UHF antenna 78 satellite 79 NTSC cable and ATSC antenna 78 NTSC cable and ATSC VHF/UHF antenna 83 nVidia 142 O On/Standby 10 On/Standby (power) button 129 One Cable Box (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) 84 One Cable TV box 89 One Cable TV or Digital Cable box (NTSC) 90 one satellite receiver 94 Online Guides 172 Online Spotlight 173 accessing using Media Center 173
Index 185 Open cabinet 25 open-back 24 optical cords 46 Optional set-up 133 overview connecting audio devices 34 connecting video equipment 104 features 2 TV signal source 72 video input connections 75 video out connections 58 P PC Doctor 157 PC Help & Tools 157 PC System Recovery 157 PDA 122 Performance and Maintenance 111 Peripheral Connection 114 peripheral devices 122 Personal Media Drive 123 pixels 151 Placement 25 power outage, recovery from 165 powered speaker 48 Powered speakers 54 premium channels 75 printer 122 connecting 122 troubleshooting 164 problems 159 Problems and Solutions 160 Product features 2 Program Guide, Television 151 Progressive scan 60 R receiver/amplifier 40 Recognizing the camcorder 111 Recorded TV Programs 175 recorded TV programs, protecting 175 recording devices 137 configuring with Media Center 137 recovery disc about 172 as used after replacing hard drive 178 supplied 29 recovery discs 172 recovery programs, using 157 registering for updates 155 Registering with HP 155 remote control 62, 97 button functions 14 installing batteries 16 maximum range 16 troubleshooting 163 using with your TV 62 Remote Control Batteries 16 Remote Control Buttons 14 remote IR transmitter cable connection connecting 99 importance of placement 97 location 98 relation to cable box and satellite receiver 97 troubleshooting 163 remote receiver 97 remove the HP Personal Media Drive 125 removing CD/DVD 167 personal media drive 123 replacing batteries in keyboard 13 batteries in remote control 16 hard drive 175, 176, 177 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 175 Required Setup 132 requirements, network connections 113 reset procedure, HP Digita l Entertainment Center 165 resolution 60 resolution, adjusting desktop display 144 retail VHS tapes 105 RJ-45 119 router 120 Router Internet connection 120 router, connecting to 120
186 HP Digital Entertainment Center S Safely Remove Hardware wizard 123 Safety and Comfort Guide 157 safety information 17 satellite receiver 71, 93 connecting one unit 93 connecting two units 95 dual tuner option 72 setting up using Media Center 132 Scan for hardware changes 111 Scanner 122 scanner connecting 122 SDTV 74 second display 142 select recording device 137 sensor, remote IR transmitter cable connection, connecting 99 set-top box 75 Setup 27 signal conversion 75 Signal Source 72 Single-tuner 72 SmartMedia (SM) 5 SmartMedia/xD 5 software 127, 156 speaker types, supported 35 speaker volume 138 speakers 2.0 system setup 41 2.1 system setup with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 system setup with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 system setup with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 system setup with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 configuring audio settings 139 configuring using Media Center 133 connecting monitor speakers 54 testing using Media Center 140 troubleshooting surround sound 161 troubleshooting volume problems 160 Standard definition television 58 Start Here booklet 19 Starting the HP Digital En tertainment Center for the First Time 128 subwoofer for digital speaker setup 53 for monitor speaker installation 54 support for HP Digital Entertainment Center 170 supported 5.1 digital audio formats 46 network connection types 113 speaker types 35 surge protector 32, 129 Surround 6 Surround Back 6 surround sound, troubleshooting 161 S-video 75 adapter 75 connection requirements 58 jack and cable compatibility 103 location on front panel 4 to composite adapter 102 S-video Out 7 Switching 61 switching between dual displays 142 switching audio video using your monitor 68 using your receiver 66 using your TV 64 synchronizing the keyboard 130, 166 Syncing the Keyboard 130
Index 187 system components, inventory of 29 System Integration 20 System Problems and Solutions 164 System Recovery 172 System Restore 157, 172 System utilities 157 T tape player 55 connecting 55 Television Program Guide 151 testing audio settings using Media Center 140 system connections using Media Center 135 Titan TV 151 transfer wizard 155 transferring data from PC to HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 troubleshooting 159 audio problems 160 DVD player 169 hard drive 169 keyboard 166 memory card reader 168 monitor 167 music files 169 power up of HP Digital Entertainment Center 164 printer 164 remote control 163 remote sensor 163 removing CD/DVD 167 speaker volume 160 special keyboard buttons 166 surround sound 161 system connections using Media Center 135 TV problems 162, 167 unexpected startups 165 video errors 168 tuner configurations 72 Tuning the Desktop Display for S-video and Video (Composite) Connections 151 turning on location of power button 3 troubleshooting 164 turntable 55 TV adjusting desktop display resolution 144 antenna 80 Audio Connection 39 configuring with Media Center 133 disconnecting 143 Display 134 Program Guide 151 Source 71 Source Connectors 75, 76 Titan 151 troubleshooting 162, 167 viewing PC image on a second TV 142 TV and Monitor Out 70 TV Out (through AV receiver) 67 TV Source 1 In 8 TV Source 2 In 8 TV Source In 71 Two Cable Boxes (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) 86 Two Satellite Receivers 95 two screens 141 U UHF 73 Updates from HP 173 upmix 46, 52 USB 121 USB 2.0 7 USB 2.0 connectors 5 USB device connecting 122 USB device connection 122 USB drive 122 utility programs 156 location 156
188 HP Digital Entertainment Center V VCR 101, 104 connecting 105 Direct in 105 Ventilation 25 VGA Out 7 VHF 73 VHF Antenna (NTSC) 80 video analog camera, connecting 112 Video Camera 109 video configuration 141 video digital camera connecting 109 FireWire connection 4 troubleshooting connections 162 video display flickering 165 Video Equipment 32, 101 Connections 104 Overview 102 video image 152 video input 112 Video Out 58 Video Out Connectors 59, 63 Video out to high-definition capable HDTV 65 Video out to standard TV 65 Video Out to TV 64 Video Out to TV and Monitor 69 Video Problems and Solutions 162 video projector 64 video system errors 168 location of output connectors 58 Viewing the HP Digital Entertainment Center image on the TV 142 virus protection 155 need for 155 volume icon 138 locating on task bar 138 volume of speaker, adjusting 138 W Wall clearance 26 wall outlet 129 Wall to set-top box VCR to TV 108 Wall to VCR to TV 106 warnings ii against removing media while LED is blinking 5 disconnecting disk drive while it is operating 125 loss of recorded programs 175 moving personal media drive while it is operating 123 order of power connection 17 use of correct AC power source 17 Warranty and Support Guide 171 about 171 Web address for Media Center information 173 for registering your HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 Web site support, HP Customer Support 171 Welcome 1 Wi-Fi accessory box 118 Wi-Fi antenna 118 Windows Welcome 131 Wireless access point 117 wireless keyboard, location of LED 4 Wireless LAN 8, 117 Wireless network 117 Wireless or Ethernet (10BaseT) 116 wireless router 117 X xD media 5 XP Media Center Edition 2005 74 Y Y adapter cables 48 required for speakers 48 Y, Pb, Pr 58 Y/C video 77 Part Number: 5991-1774
The only warranties for HP products and ser vices are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and ser vices. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. HP assumes no responsibility for the us e or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP . This document contains proprietar y information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of HP . Hewlett-Packard Company P .O. Box 4010 Cupertino, CA 95015-4010 USA © 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard De velopment Company , L.P . This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certa in U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protecti on technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless other w ise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098, and 4,907,093 licensed for limited viewing uses only . FireWire and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer , Inc. HP supports lawful use of technology and does not endorse or encourage the use of its products for purposes other than those permitted by copyright law . Intel, Pentium, Intel Inside, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries/ regions. Microsoft, the Microsoft logo, Windows, and W indows XP are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information in this docu ment is subject to change without notice. W arnings and notes Color-coded warnings and notes with additional text contain important inform ation. Sample warnings and notes are displayed on this page. w A warning describes information you need to avoid possible personal injury , damage to equipment, or irrecoverable data loss. T ext set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. Read and follow all warnings. n A note describes important information you need.
T able of Contents T able of Contents iii T able of Contents Before Y ou Begin ..................... 1 Welcome ............................ ................................ 1 Benefits and Features......... ................................... 2 Functional Overview ............................. 3 Front Panel ....................... ................................... 3 Memory Card Reader ........... ................................ 5 Back Panel ....................... ................................... 6 Cleaning the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter ............................ 9 Shipping the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter ............................ 9 Keyboard ........................................... 10 Wireless Keyboard Operatio n ............................. 12 Replacing the Keyboard Batt eries......................... 13 Remote Control ................................... 14 Remote Control Buttons ...... ................................. 14 Remote Control Operation . ................................. 16 Installing the Remote Control Batteries .................. 16 Safety Information ................. 17 AC Power Safety Warnings .................. .............. 17 Installation Over view ............ 19 System Audio/Video Connections ....... 20 System Integration .......... .................................... 20 System Diagram ............... ................................. 22 Installation Guidelines ........................ 24 Placement and Ventilation Requirements ............... 25 Basic Setup ......................................... 27 Setting Up the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter .......................... 27 Inventory ............................................ 29 Cables Included ................. ................................ 30 Connecting Audio ................... 33 Audio Overview ..................................34 Audio Output Connectors .... ................... ............. 34 Sound Connector Jacks ....... ................................ 35 Speaker Types ................... ................................ 35 Speaker Configurations ...... ................... ............. 36 T ypical Audio Connection ..................... 38 TV Audio Connection ...........................39 Connecting TV Audio.......... ................................ 39 A V Receiver Audio Connection ............. 40 AV Receiver Equipment Ov erview ........................ 40 2.0 Home Stereo Installati on ............... ................ 41 2.1 Home Stereo Installati on ............... ................ 42 4.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 43 5.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 44 7.1 Home Theater Audio . ... ................................ 45 Digital Home Theater Audio . .................. ............. 46 Powered Speaker Audio Connection .... 48 2.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 49 4.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 50 5.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 51 7.1 Powered Speakers ....... ................................ 52 Digital Powered Speakers ... ................................ 53 Monitor Speakers ............... ................... ............. 54 Audio In Connections ........................... 55 FM Radio Antenna ............................... 56
iv HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting V ideo Out ............ 57 Video Out Over view ........................... 58 Video Out Connection Overview ......................... 58 Video Out Connectors ......... ............................... 59 Component Video Settings ... ............................... 60 TV Display Overview ........... ............................... 61 Audio and Video Switching Overview .................. 61 Using the Remote Control wi th Your TV ................. 62 T ypical Video Out Connections ............. 63 Video Out to TV ................................... 64 Video Out from A V Receiver to TV ....... 66 Video Out to Monitor .......................... 68 Video Out to TV and Monitor ............... 69 Connecting TV Source In ......... 71 TV Source Overview ............................ 72 TV Signal Source Overview ................... .............. 72 Additional HDTV Informatio n ............................... 74 TV Source Connectors Over view .......................... 75 TV Source Connectors ...... .................... .............. 76 T ypical TV Source Connections ............. 78 Antenna Connection ............................ 80 Antenna (NTSC) ................. ............................... 80 Antenna (ATSC) .................. ............................... 81 Antenna (NTSC and ATSC) ................................. 82 Cable Connection ................................ 83 Cable (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC)...................... 83 One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) .............................. 84 Two Cable TV Boxes, or Two Digital Cable Receivers (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) ................ 86 Cable Only (NTSC) ............. ............................... 88 One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (N TSC) ........................... 89 Two Cable TV Boxes, or Two Digital Cable Receiver s ............................... 91 Satellite Connection ............................. 93 One Satellite Receiver (NTS C) ............................. 93 Two Satellite Receivers (NTSC) ............................ 95 Infrared T ransmitter Connection .......... 97 Infrared Transmitter Overvi ew .............................. 97 Infrared Transmitter Insta llation ........... ................. 99 Connecting V ideo Equipment . ...........................101 Video Equipment Over view ............... 102 Connectors ....................... ............................... 102 Video Equipment Connection Overview .............. 103 T ypical Video Equipment Connections ...................................... 104 VCR Connection ................................. 105 VCR Direct In Connection ... ............................... 105 Wall to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cable ............. 106 Video Camera Connection ................. 109 Connecting a Digital Video Camcorder .............. 109 Connecting an Analog Camcorder ..................... 112 Connecting the Network .......113 Peripheral Connection Overview ....... 114 T ypical Network Connections ............ 116 Connecting the Wireless Network Antenna ............................. 117 Connecting a DSL/Cable Modem ........ 119
T able of Contents v T able of Contents Connecting Through a Router ............ 120 USB Device Connection...................... 121 Digital Still Camera ........... ............................... 121 Other USB Devices ............ ............................... 122 Connecting an HP Personal Media Drive .................. 123 Installing an HP Personal Media Drive ................ 124 Disconnecting an HP Personal Media Drive ......... 125 Initial Configuration ............. 127 Starting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First Time .................... 128 Installing the Keyboard Batteries (Initial) .............. 128 Initial Startup ................. .................... .............. 1 29 Syncing the Keyboard ....... ............................... 130 Windows W elcome ........................... 131 Media Center First Run ...................... 132 Required Setup ................. ............................... 132 Optional Setup ................. ............................... 133 If Your Connections Donât Work ........................ 1 35 Adjusting the Front Panel Display Brightness ........ 135 Configuring Audio ............................ 136 Connecting Headphones ...... ............................ 136 Connecting a Microphone .... ............................ 136 Adjusting the Volume......... ............................... 138 Configuring Audio Output .. ............................... 139 Configuring Video ............................ 141 Configuring Video Output .. ............................... 141 Dual screen ...................... ............................... 142 Adjusting the Desktop Displa y ........................... 144 Adjusting the Display in Me dia Center................ 1 45 DVD Playback ..................... ............................ 148 Adjusting the Display from the Desktop ............... 149 HDTV Overscan Configuratio n ........................... 150 Finding ATSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels ..................... ................... ........... 151 Tuning the Desktop Display . ................... ........... 151 Configuring the System ..................... 154 Configuring the Keyboard Bu ttons ...................... 154 Registering with HP ......... ................... .............. 155 Setting Up Virus Protection .................. .............. 155 Transferring Information from Your Old PC to Your HP Digital Entertainment Center ............. 155 Installing Software ........... ................... .............. 156 Utility Programs............... ................... .............. 156 T r oubleshooting .................... 159 Problems and Solutions ..................... 160 Audio ................. ............................................ 160 Video ................. ............................................ 162 System .............................. ................... ........... 164 Getting Help ...................................... 170 Help and Support Center .... ................... ........... 170 HP Support ..................... ................... .............. 170 Warranty and Support Guid e ............................ 171 Updates from HP ................ ................... ........... 173 Microsoft Web Site ............ ................... ........... 173 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive .................... 175 Important Information About Recorded TV Programs ...... ................... ........... 175 Procedure ............................................ ........... 175 Index ................................... 179
vi HP Digital Entertainment Center
Before Y ou Begin Before Y ou Begin 1 Before Y ou Begin We l c o m e Thank you for purchasing the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center puts you in control of your complete home entertainment experience. Enjoy your TV , movies, music, photos, and home videos with one simple interface. Pause and replay live TV , and record your favorite TV shows. Use a television program guide without a monthly fee. Capture, personalize, and create DVDs of your home movies, and back up your photos, music, or favorite TV programs onto DVD. Use other entertainment equipment â like a TV , A V receiver , satellite receiver , an d digital camera â with the HP Digital Entertainment Center to create an integrated system. Access all of your TV programs, videos, pictures, music CDs, and DVDs using Microsoft ® Media Center software and the remote control. This Userâ s Guide helps you to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center to use with your audio/video system. The HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âFunctional Over viewâ on page 3 âKeyboardâ on page 10 âRemote Controlâ on page 14
2 HP Digital Entertainment Center Benefits and Features Benefits â Complete home digital en tertainment solution for your living room. â W atch, pause, and replay live TV on one channel while recording another (select models only). â Schedule future recordings with the complimentar y TV programming guide (no charge â separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). â Burn a DVD of your favorite TV shows or home videos. â Play DVDs in 7.1 surround sound (surround sound system is required and sold separately). â Burn music audio CDs (for lawful use only). â Store audio CDs in an easy-to-use music jukebox. â Listen to your collection of MP3 and AAC music. â Burn picture slide shows to CD or DVD. â View and edit your favorite digital photos. â Store your digital content on the HP Personal Media Drive. â Download movies on demand (fees may apply â separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). â Instant-message friends (separately purchased broadband Internet ser vice required). Pr oduct features â Sophisticated, sleek, stackable case fits into your A V cabinet â Built-in standard-definition TV tuner , NTSC (Dual tuners for select models only) â Built-in high-definition A TSC HDTV tuner (select models only) â Personal video recorder (PVR) with a complimentar y TV programming guide (no charge) â Built-in FM radio tuner â HP Personal Media Drive â Front panel media info display â CD/DVD double-layer , multiformat player/recorder â 9-in-1 media card reader â Rear and front A V connectors: â Digital Audio Out: Opti cal and coaxial S/PDIF 5.1 surround â Analog Audio Out: Up to 7.1 channels â Video Out: DVI, VGA, S-video, component, composite video â LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 â Integrated 802.11 b/g wireless â Front A V , USB, and FireWire ® (IEEE 1394) connectors for video capture â Full function remote control â Lap-sized, compact wireless keyboard with integrated trackball mouse
Before Y ou Begin 3 Before Y ou Begin Functional Over view Fr ont Panel The following illustration shows a typical HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel. Y our model might not have all features. Front panel Item Function Comments On/Standby (power) button and LED Push to turn on. Push for standby . Press and hold button 4 seconds to turn off. Solid blue: On Solid amber: Standby CD/DVD player/recorder Progressive scan DVD player plus double-layer DVD RW/DVD-R recorder CD/DVD, multiformat Push the Eject button to open. Push the tray or Eject button to close. T ranspor t control buttons Replay , Play , Pause, Stop, Skip, Eject Experience mode status indicators White indicates DVD, TV , radio, music, pictures, videos, activities in Media Center Personal Media Drive Bay Removable HP Personal Media Drive behind top right door , for additional storage for recorded TV shows and digital content HP Digital Entertainment Center A V inputs USB and card readers CD/DVD HP Persona l Me di a Dr i ve Bay Media info display
4 HP Digital Entertainment Center 9-in-1 memor y card readers SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive, MS/MS-Pro USB 2.0 (2) Card readers behind lower right door LED: Green (with media inserted) Off (no media inserted) See âMemor y Card Readerâ on page 5. Media info display Front st atus panel for all media information. Front-panel text content displayed from Media Center Behind left door A V connectivity for capturing analog and digital video from camcorders Front A V inputs â see below Keyboard connect switch for wireless keyboard synchronization Blinking green LED indicates keyboard activity . Special blink status indicates sync with keyboard. S-video In Y/C video, analog 4-pin Video In Composite video RCA jack Audio In White: Left Red: Right, RCA jacks 1394 DV In FireWire (IEEE 1394), 4-pin input-output for digital video Headphone Out 1/4 inch jack Microphone In 1/8 inch mini-jack Item Function Comments HP Digital Entertainment Center E ED 2 .0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SP EED SB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC I N HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT S-VIDEO FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R CON FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO D L R 1 AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MI C HEADPHONES CONNECT I O DV IN R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES DV IN R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES
Before Y ou Begin 5 Before Y ou Begin Memor y Card Reader The HP Digital Entertainment Center 9-in-1 card readers are on the front panel, located behind a door for quick transfer of digital photos an d other digital content. Four horizontal card slots accept memor y cards. An in-use light-emitting diode (LED) indicates card reader activity when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is reading or writing data. W ait until the LED stops blinking before removing media. Digital cameras and other digital devices use memor y cards, or media, to store digital picture files. T wo USB 2.0 connectors are also included. Y our model might not have all features. Memory card readers w Removing media when the in-use light is blinking may cause damage. On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 Item Name Slot Supports Insert media SmartMedia/xD Upper-left SmartMedia (SM) memor y card/ xD media Facing up MMC/SD Upper-right MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) memor y card Facing up CompactFlash I/II Microdrive Lower-left CompactFlash T ype I, II media Microdrive disk drive Receptacle edge (holes) MS/MS-Pro Lower-right Memory Stick (MS) Memor y Stick (MS-Pro) Facing up SmartMedia / xD Comp actFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO
6 HP Digital Entertainment Center Back Panel The following illustration shows the HP Di gital Entertainment Center back panel. (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Supported format Audio In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog stereo Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Surround Back RCA jacks Brown: Left Beige: Right Analog: 7.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Surround RCA jacks Blue: Left Grey: Right Analog: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1, 4.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Center/Subwoofer RCA jacks Green: center Purple: subwoofer Analog: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out Front RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog stereo: 7.1, 6.1, 5.1, 4.1, 2.1, 2.0 Digital Audio Out Coaxial Orange S/PDIF 5.1 only DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz AUDIO IN R L SURROUND BACK R L SURROUND R L CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R L COAXIAL
Before Y ou Begin 7 Before Y ou Begin Digital Audio Out Optical Gray S/PDIF 5.1 only Vid eo Ou t (Composite) RCA jack Y ellow Analog: Interlaced scan S-video Out Y/C video 4-pin Black Analog: Interlaced scan Up to 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz Component Video Out (Not all modes support DVD playback due to content protection.) 3 RCA jacks Green: Y Blue: Pb Red: Pr Analog: Interlaced or progressive scan interlaced displays up to 1080i, Plus 480p, 720p VGA Out 15-pin D-sub Blue Analog: Up to 2048 x 1536 with panning depending on display size Digital Video Out (DVI) DVI-I 29-pin D-sub digital/ analog White Digital: Up to 1600 x 1200 Up to 2048 x 1536 with panning depending on display size USB 2.0 (high speed) 4 ports Silver USB 2.0 1394 (for digital video or other device) 6-pin DV input/ output Silver FireWire (IEEE 1394) Ethernet 10/100/1000 RJ-45 N/A 10/100/1000 Item Connector T ype Color Suppor ted format DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y Pb Pr COMPONENT OUT VGA DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI HI SPEED USB 2.0 1394 10/100/1000 ETHERNET
8 HP Digital Entertainment Center Wireless LAN Removable antenna Gold 802.11 b/g LEDs (2) Activity: Blinks when transmits/ receives data Link: Solid green when wireless LAN is enabled and connected. Blinks when wireless LAN is scanning. Wireless LAN 802.11b/g Audio TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog Video (Composite) TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz S-video TV Source 1 In Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz Cable/Antenna In Coaxial Silver RF NTSC with internal splitter to dual-tuners FM Antenna In 75 Ohm Coaxial Silver FM radio, RF Audio TV Source 2 In (Select models only) RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Analog S-video TV Source 2 In (Select models only) Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Analog: Up to 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz HDTV/SDTV Ant. In (Select models only) Coaxial Silver RF A TSC (from UHF and VHF antenna) Infrared T ransmitter Out (2 outputs) 1/8 inch mini-jack Silver Remote infrared (IR Blaster) AC In AC 110â240V 50â60 Hz Black Power Item Connector T ype Color Supported format WIRELESS LAN REMOV ABLE ANTENNA 802.11 b/g ACTIVITY LINK AUDIO R L S-VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER N FM ANTENNA IN 75 ⦠CO AXIAL A L E R AUDIO R L S-VIDEO HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 AC IN 110-240V 50-60Hz
Before Y ou Begin 9 Before Y ou Begin Cleaning the HP Digital Enter tainment Center The HP Digital Entertainment Center is a high-quality device that requires special care when cleaning. T o clean the HP Digital Entertainment Center , follow these steps: 1 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Center and connected equipment. 2 Unplug the HP Digital Entertainment Center from the wall outlet before cleaning. 3 Use a soft dr y cloth for cleaning. 4 Plug in the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 T urn on connected equipment and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Shipping the HP Digital Enter tainment Center Keep the original packing box in a storage area. Y ou may need it later if you move or ship your HP Digital Entertainment Center . w Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners to clean your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not use benzene, thinner , ammonia, or any other volatile substances. These chemicals may damage your unit.
10 HP Digital Entertainment Center Keyboard The following illustration shows the HP Digi tal Entertainment Center wireless keyboard. The following table shows the wireless keyboard features and function keys from left to right. Icon Item Description On/Standby T urns HP Digital Enter tainment Center on, when in standby . Places HP Digital Entertainment Center in standby . Indicator light Amber: Caps Lock on. Green: Key or mouse button activity . Mouse button left, right Left-click, right-click. Back Displays previously viewed Media Center or browser page. For ward Displays next viewed Media Center or browser page. Internet Opens your Internet browser . E-mail Opens an Internet e-mail page or your e-mail software. T rackBall Left, right mouse button Back Forward Internet E-mail
Before Y ou Begin 11 Before Y ou Begin Messenger Opens your instant messaging program. Minimize Minimizes the Media Center application. Maximize Maximizes the Media Center application. Media Center Starts Media Center . Previous Selects previous media track. Play Plays media. Pause Pauses media. Next Selects next media track. V ol â Decreases speaker volume. V ol Increases speaker volume. Mute T urns speaker sound on and off. T rackball Moves cursor on screen. Icon Item Description Messenger Minimize Maximize Center Media Previous Play Pause Next Vol Vol Mute
12 HP Digital Entertainment Center Wireless Keyboard Operation Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center includes a wireless keyboard that uses a built-in receiver/transmitter instead of a connector cable to communicate. The Keyboard Connect button, behind the lower-left door of the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel, has an LED that indicates receiver activity . Approximate range is 12 feet (3.66 meters). n The Internet, E-mail, and Messenger buttons can be reconfigured to open a W eb site or software program. See âConfiguring the Keyboard Buttonsâ on page 154. Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . n Use only alkaline batteries in the keyboard. On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUD IO DV IN L R 1 394 MIC IN HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT
Before Y ou Begin 13 Before Y ou Begin Replacing the Keyboard Batteries Keep spare batteries on hand. Batter y life will var y with the use of the system. 1 Slide the batter y cover off the back of the keyboard. 2 Insert four AA batteries (alkaline). Make sure the batter y positive and negative ends are inserted correctly! 3 Replace the batter y cover . 4 Make sure the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on. 5 Te s t t h e k e y b o a r d . â The keyboard is set to connect to the HP Digital Entertainment Center automatically . 6 If the keyboard does not operate: a Check the batter y orientation. b Sync the keyboard. See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. If you have no batteries and must use a keyboard, attach a USB keyboard to the back or front panel. Y ou can also use the remote control for many functions as a temporar y substitute.
14 HP Digital Entertainment Center Remote Contr ol Remote Contr ol Buttons AS t a n d b y Puts the HP Digital Entertainment Center into and out of a power- reduced standby state. It does not turn the HP Digital Entertainment Center off. BD V D Menu Opens Play DVD window in Media Center or opens the main menu of a DVD movie, if available. CM u s i c Starts My Music. DR a d i o Star ts FM Radio. ER e c o r d Records selected television program and stores it on the hard disk drive. FR e w (Rewind) Moves the media backward (press button for three speeds). GR e p l a y Rewinds live or recorded TV back 8 seconds, or to beginning of music track or DVD chapter . HP a u s e Pauses audio and video tracks and live or recorded TV programs. JB a c k Returns to the previous window within Media Center . KA r r o w s Buttons move the cursor to navigate within all Media Center windows. They also move for ward and backward through slide- show images. DVD MENU MUSIC RADIO RECORD REW REPLA Y P AUSE LM e d i a Center Opens Media Center to the main menu. MV o l u m e Increases ( ) and decreases (â) sound. NL i v e T V Is a shortcut to view live TV . It also moves to the current point in a live TV program after pausing live TV . OG u i d e Opens the T elevision Program Guide to display available TV channels and programs to watch and record. PC l e a r Deletes the selection and works as the Backspace key does on a keyboard. QT V Starts My TV . RP i c t u r e s Star ts My Pictures. SV i d e o s Starts My Videos. TP l a y Plays the selected media. US t o p Stops the selected media. TV PICTURES VIDEOS PLA Y STOP (Features and location may vary . Refer to the specific documentation for other remote contr ols.)
Before Y ou Begin 15 Before Y ou Begin SKIP FWD STOP PLA Y MUSIC PICTURES VIDEOS RADIO TV DVD MENU P AUSE REPLA Y REW RECORD A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF VF w d (Fast-for ward) Moves media for ward (press button for three speeds). WS k i p Moves media for ward â for example, 30 seconds in videos and live TV , one music track, or one DVD chapter . XM o r e ( i ) Displays available information about a selected media file and displays more information and options. YO K Selects the desired action or window option. It acts as the Enter key . ZC H / P G Up ( ) and down (â) change the TV channel or move pages up and down, depending on available options. AA Mute T urns sound off. The word Mute is displayed on the Media Center screen when Mute is turned on. AB Re c o r d ed TV Opens the Recorded TV window . AC 0 to 9, #, * Numeric keypad buttons to change channels or enter text into the Media Center search or text box. AD Enter Selects the desired action or window option. In full-screen mode, press Enter to return to the last channel you were watching. AE Print Prints selected content on the screen. AF LED Activity indicator lights on pressing a button. FWD SKIP OK
16 HP Digital Entertainment Center Remote Contr ol Operation Use the remote control to open the Media Center program; view TV , record TV programs, play previously recorded TV programs, and play music, movies, or video. See âUsing the Remote Controlâ in the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide for detailed instructions on using the features of the remote control. T o use the remote control, just point it at the HP Digital Entertainment Center and press a button. Use the remote control at a maximum distance of 26 feet (8 meters) from the remote sensor and at a maximum of 45 degrees (90 degrees total) from the center of the remote sensor . The remote control will not op erate until the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on and fully booted up. Installing the Remote Contr ol Batteries 1 Slide the batter y cover off the back of the remote control. 2 Insert the two AA alkaline batteries (provided). Make sure the batter y positive and negative ends are inserted correctly! 3 Replace the batter y cover . 4 T est the remote control by pressing any key . The indicator light should blink. n Media Center must be in full-screen mode (or have focus) for consistent remote control operation. Performance may var y . On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center z545 90 Ë ~2 6 feet LED Indicator Light Remote operation n Use only alkaline batteries in the remote. SKIP FWD STOP PLAY MUSIC PICTURESVIDEOS RADIO TV DVD MENU PAUSE REPLAY REW RECORD OK
Safety Information Safety Information 17 Safety Information Read Instructions before installing or operating your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Follow the instructions provided. Heed all safety warnings and notes. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for additional safety information. AC Power Safety W arnings Use the right AC source. The power supply is preset for the countr y/region in which you purchased the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you move to another countr y/region, please make sure you check its voltage requirements before plugging your HP Digital Entertainment Center into an AC power outlet. A power cord is included with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . If another cord is used, use only a power source and connection appropriate for this HP Digital Entertainment Center . Install the system near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your HP Digital Entertainment Centerâ s main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety , the power cord provided with your system has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. T o reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your system into the AC outlet before connecting it to the DSL/telephone line. Also, disconnect the DSL/telephone line before unplugging your system from the AC power outlet. This product has not been ev aluated for connection to an âITâ power system (an AC di stribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC 60950). Ground your system. T o reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, do not disable the power cord grounding feature. The grounding plug is an important safety feature. Connect the equipment to a grounded (earthed) power outlet. For your safety , be sure that the grounded power outlet into which you plug the power cord is easily accessible to the operator and is located as close to the equipment as possible. w Please read this important safety information. Chapter Contents: âAC Power Safety W arningsâ on page 17 w â Do not open top cover . â Risk of electric shock. â No user-serviceable par ts inside top cover .
18 HP Digital Entertainment Center AC Power Safety W arnings (continued) Never pull on the cord. Disconnect the HP Digital Entertainment Center by grasping the plug fir mly and pulling it from the power outlet. Never disconnect the HP Digital Entertainment Center by pulling the cord. Install your HP Digital Entertai nment Center near an outlet that you can easily reach. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not walk on the cord. Use surge protection. T o protect your HP Digital Entertainment Center and other equipment, connect all power cords for your system and its peripheral devices (such as a printer or scanner) to a surge protection device such as a power strip with surge protection or Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). Not all power strips provide surge protection; the power strips must be specifically labeled as having this ability . Use a power strip whose manufacturer offers a damage replacement policy so you can replace your equipment if surge protection fails. Use the right power source. Use only a power source and connection appropriate for this HP Digital Entertainment Center , as indicated on the label/back plate of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Be sure the total ampere rating of the products connected to the outlet does not exceed the current rating of the electrical outlet, and the total ampere rating of the products connected to the cord does not exceed the rating of the cord. Look on the power label to determine the ampere rating (AMPS or A) for each device. Outdoor antenna grounding â If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection agains t voltage surges and static buildup charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFP A 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for additional safety information. Lightning â For added protection of any HP product during a lightning storm, or wh en it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges. Power lines â An outside antenna should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circui ts, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.
Installation Overview Installation Over view 19 Installation Over view This chapter provides information on your system and describes how to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to your audio/video (A V) equipment in detail. Y ou may find connection details that wonât be in the basic Start Here booklet. The S tart Here booklet works with this Userâ s Guide . T ake a few minutes to look at the Start Here booklet before you read this chapter . Y ou may fi nd the infor mation you need there. The HP Digital Entertainment Center is ver y versatile and works with a wide variety of basic, typical, and advanced multimedia systems. The installation process is divided into four major areas: Audio, Video, TV Source In, Network. The setup can take some time, depending on your system, and may require additional cables. Chapter Contents: âSystem Audio/Video Connectionsâ on page 20 âBasic Setupâ on page 27 âInventor yâ on page 29 w Read the important safety information before you install the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
20 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Audio/V ideo Connections System Integration The HP Digital Entertainment Center incorporates many functions into one unit: â An Internet connection through a wireless or wired network, using an Internet ser vice provider (sold separately), allows the HP Digital Entertainment Center to access the T elevision Program Guide and Internet content sources. â A cable connection from a set-top box or antenna hookup (sold separately) allows the TV tuner inside the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the TV channels. â An infrared transmitter (IR blaster) connection to a set-top box from the HP Digital Enter tainment Center allows the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the set-top box channels from the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control. â Audio outputs from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV speakers or A V receiver allow up to 7.1 surround sound. â Vid eo outputs from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV or A V receiver allow you to watch TV and to view the HP Digital Entertainment Center display . â An FM radio antenna connection allows the FM tuner inside the HP Digital Entertainment Center to select the FM radio channels. â The wireless keyboard with trackball or remote control allows you to operate the HP Digital Entertainment Center from the comfor t of your couch. How you connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center into your system depends on how you want to use it. The HP Digital Entertainment Center functions as a media source, with DVD and personal video player/recorders built in. Y our A V receiver or TV functions as your audio/ video output switch. T o watch and record TV , video, and audio, you must first connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center inputs to your video, audio, and network sources. â T o play back audio/video, you must connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center outputs to your sound system and TV/display . â T o record audio/video, you must connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center inputs to your video source, such as a cable set-top box, satellite receiver , or antenna. â T o update the T elevision Program Guide and use the Internet, you must also connect to a home network or DSL/cable modem. If your HP Digital Entertainment Center has the dual-tuner option, each tuner must be connected to the same TV source. Y ou can connect two cable set-top boxes, or two, satellite receivers, or an antenna with cable splitter . The T elevision Program Guide only suppor ts one TV ser vice provider channel lineup. Audio and video output cabl es from the HP Digital Entertainment Center can be: â Routed through an A V receiver to provide an audio and video signal to your TV . Or â Routed directly to your TV . Imagine the flow of your televi sion signal into and out of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o watch and record TV , your TV signal (for example, from a satellite) must flow into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Then, for you to watch live or recorded TV , the HP Digital Enter tainment Center must send the recorded TV shows out to your TV .
Installation Over view 21 Installation Overview The following illustration shows the audio and video signal routed from the satellite or cable receiver source to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , then through an A V receiver to your TV : Audio/Video flow Set-top-box Infrared T ransmitter Download TV Program Guide Audio TV Source Data Remote Control Keyboard Internet AV In AV Receiver TV or Monitor Cable In HP Digital Entertainment Center AV Out DSL/Cable Modem or Wireless Router Cable Box or Satellite Receiver TV Source In Infrared T ransmitter AV Video Network Data Digital Video Camcorder HP Digital Entertainment Center VHF Antenna UHF Antenna HDTV (A TSC) and/or NTSC Over-the-air Digital Signal
22 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Diagram Back Panel DIGITA L VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI S PEED US B 2.0 ETHE RNET 13 94 AUDIO IN R L AUDI O 7.1 PRE -OUT SURR OUND B ACK SURR OUND CE NTER SUB WOOFER FR ONT R R R L L L VID EO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb V GA Pr INFRARED TRANSMI TTER OUT 1 2 TV SOU RCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LA N 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE AN TENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4 /A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDE O AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Cable or Satellite Set-top box 2 VGA MONITOR DVI D SL/ Cable Mo dem Note: Connect Set-top box 2 only (optional) OUT W all Router/ Firewall/ Switch iPod Surge Protector Line Conditioner WiFi Antenna AC Wall Outlet Internet Digital Camera Printer Ext. HDD Cable or Satellite Set-top box 1 Surround Left Center Surround Right Front Left Front Right Surround Back Right Speakers S-video Video Com ponent S-video Composite Coaxial S-video Composite Surround Back Left Subwoofer AV RECEIVER IN TV IN S-Video Video Pr Pb Y Audio In 7.1 Multichannel Surr. Back Surround Center Sub Front Digital Optical Coaxial CD or T ape Player Choose one Choose one Choose one Cable From Wall Coaxial Note: 5.1 systems do not include âSurr . Backâ connections. OUT FM Antenna Choose one Digital Video Camcorder OUT Roof Antenna UHF Antenna VHF Antenna HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER (Configurations may vary .)
Installation Over view 23 Installation Overview Fr ont Panel (Configurations may vary .) The following illustration shows a typical HP Digital Entertainment Center system front panel installation: On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlas h I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES FRONT INPUT S-V IDEO V IDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 13 94 MIC IN HEADPHONES Analog Video Camera Digital Video Camera Digital Camera USB 2.0 (x2) Choose one S-video Video (Composite) 1 394 Card Readers: SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive MS/MS Pro Power On CD/DVD Player/Recorder Media Info Display HP Personal Media Drive
24 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installation Guidelines T o enhance the per formance and extend the life of your HP Digital Entertainment Center: â Keep your HP Digital Entertainment Center in a well-ventilated area, away from excessive light, heat, or moisture. â Keep ventilation slots clear of obstructions such as equipment or papers. The HP Digital Entertainment Center automatically turns off if it gets too hot. â This product is heavy . Exercise caution when lifting or moving. â Place your HP Digital Entertainment Center on a stable, supported sur face. Do not drop or place it on an unstable surface. â Put your HP Digital Entertainment Center into Standby when not in use. In Standby , the On/ Standby button is lit amber . Preset recordings only start when the HP Digital Enter tainment Center is on or in Standby . â Adjust only those controls that are described in the operating instructions. â Do not open your HP Digital Entertainment Center cabinet or attempt to ser vice this product yourself. If your HP Digital Entertainment Center is not operating properly or has been dropped or damaged, contact your HP authorized dealer , reseller , or ser vice provider . Choosing an HP Digital Entertainment Center setup location If you intend to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV , a set-to p box, or a surround sound system, HP recommends that you choose a clear working area with easy access to the connectors of these devices. If your TV is wall-mounted, make sure that you have access to the rear ports on the TV before attempting to connect it to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . w An open-back is required for adequate cooling when installing your HP Digital Entertainment Center in an A V cabinet. 17 in 432 mm On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center 4.5 in 114.3 mm 16.25 in 412.75 mm w Leave slots and openings in the HP Digital Entertainment Center cabinet open for ventilation. These openings must not be blocked or covered. Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings.
Installation Over view 25 Installation Overview Placement and V entilation Requirements Cabinet Fr ont IMPORT ANT : Use an open cabinet or shelves for best operation of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not cover vents on top, back and sides of the unit. If you choose to use a cabine t with front doors, you must leave the doors open when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is powered on. . Open cabinet (Actual home setup may vary .) w Failure to follow these ventilation requirements could cause the HP Digital Entertainment Center to malfunction. H P D ig ita l E n te r ta i n m e n t C e n t e r
26 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cabinet Back The back of the A V cabinet should be open for best operation. If the A V cabinet has a back, the back must have a hole behind the HP Digital Entertainment Center , for air circulation, with a minimum open area of 19 inches (48.3 cm) wide by 6.5 inches (16.5 cm) high. See the following illustration. Wa l l C l e a r a n c e The HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel must be at least 4 inches (10.2 cm) from the wall. Cabinet 6.5" H minimum Back View HP Digital Entertainment Center 1" minimum 1" minimum 2" minimum 19" W minimum Note: These clearances are required for proper ventilation. Cabinet 4" minimum Side View Back of cabinet HP Digital Entertainment Center W all
Installation Over view 27 Installation Overview Basic Setup Follow the steps in the Start Here booklet to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Most of the hardware devices such as the monitor and printer can be connected at the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Some peripheral devices, such as a digital video camera, can be plugged into the connectors on the back panel or the front panel (behind lower doors) of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Setting Up the HP Digital Enter tainment Center The basic steps to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center are in the Start Here booklet as follows. Y our system may be different. See the referenced sections for detailed information on each step. Before you begin: â Read âSafety Informationâ on page 17. â Read âInstallation Guidelinesâ on page 24. â Refer to the Start Here booklet as a guide to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Required steps 1 Unpack the box contents. a T ake inventor y . See âInventor yâ on page 29. Identify the items included with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . b Identify equipment you will need that is not supplied. c Place the HP Digital Entertainment Center where you can easily reach the back panel. 2 Determine how you will connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your system. 3 Connect the audio cables. See âT ypical Audio Connectionâ on page 38. a Audio In (optional) b Audio Out (to TV , A V receiver , speakers) c Digital Audio Out 4 Connect the V ideo Out to the TV or display . See âT ypical Video Out Connectionsâ on page 63. w Read the important safety information before you install the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
28 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5 Connect the TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In cables. See âT ypical TV Source Connectionsâ on page 78. a Connect the Cable/Antenna In. b Connect the Source 1 In audio/video cables to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 1. c Connect the Source 2 In audio/video cables to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 2 (select models only). d Connect the Infrared T ransmitter 1 to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 1. e Connect the Infrared T ransmitter 2 to cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver 2 (select models only). f Connect the HDTV Antenna In. 6 Connect the FM radio an tenna. See âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56. 7 Connect the Internet network cables. See âT ypical Network Connectionsâ on page 116. a DSL/cable modem to Internet (Ethernet) b Wir el ess an te nn a 8 Pull the tab on the keyboard to activate the batteries. See âInstalling the Keyboard Batteries (Initial)â on page 128. 9 Insert the remote control batteries. See âInstalling the Remote Control Batteriesâ on page 16. 10 Place the HP Digital Enter tainment Center on a flat, stable surface with the following clearances: â T op: 2 inches (5.08 cm) â Side: 1 inch (2.54 cm) â Back: Open cabinet See âSafety Informationâ on page 17. 11 T ur n on all equipment, and then turn on the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . See âStarting the HP Digital Entertainment Center for the First Timeâ on page 128. 12 Complete the initial star tup and registration. See âWindows W elcomeâ on page 131. a Follow the onscreen instructions. b Set up Media Center . 13 Optional step (Recommended after basic setup) Connect any additional rear panel devices. a FireWire (IEEE 1394) device or digital video camera. See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. b USB devices, such as printers or scanners (up to 4). See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. 14 Optional step (Recommended after basic setup) Connect front panel devices. a FireWire (IEEE 1394) device or digital video camera. See âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101. b USB devices, such as printers or scanners (up to 2). See âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114. c VCR or analog video camera. See âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101. d Insert the removable hard disk drive (optional). See âConnecting an HP Personal Media Driveâ on page 123. Begin using your system. See the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide .
Installation Over view 29 Installation Overview Inventor y The following items are supplied with the HP Digital Entertainment Center: Name Picture Description HP Digital Entertainment Center unit See âFunctional Over viewâ on page 3. Keyboard See âKeyboardâ on page 10. Remote control See âRemote Controlâ on page 14. Cables See âCables Includedâ on page 30. FM antenna Antenna for FM radio, 75-ohm coaxial. See âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56. Wi-Fi antenna Antenna for Wireless LAN 802.11 b/g, removable. See âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117. Documentation Printed documentation is included. DVD recover y discs (2) Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide. Batteries: AA (6) 2 for remote (in package), 4 for keyboard (inside keyboard). HP Digital Entertainment Center H P H o m e T h e a te r P C S y ste m R e c o v e ry W i n d o w s ® X P M e d i a C e n te r E d i t i o n 2 0 0 4 S u p p o rt fo r M ic ro so ft p ro d u ct s is p r o v ide d b y H P . Fo r distribu tio n o nly w ith a n ew PC . © 2 0 03 - 2004 Hewle tt- P a ckard De velopme nt Compa ny, L.P. Portion s ©2 0 0 3. M i cr osoft Co rporatio n. All ri ghts r eserved. Prod uc t of X X XXXX. T h is C D c a n O N LY b e u se d w it h a n H P H o m e T h e a te r P C . R e fe r to th e p r in te d in str u ct io n s p r o v id e d w ith y o u r R e co ve ry C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 B a sic S e tu p Connect your system to the back panel. Y our connector locations and system components may var y . HP Digital Entertainment Center Start Here Softw are G uide HP Digital Enter tainment Center S oftw a re G u id e HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Home Theater PC System Recovery W in d o w s ® X P M e d ia C e n te r E d itio n 2 0 0 4 S u p p o r t fo r M ic ro s o ft p r o d u c ts is p r o v id e d b y H P . For distribution only w ith a new PC. © 2 0 0 3 -2 0 0 4 H e w le tt- P a ck a rd D e v e lo p m e n t C o m p a n y, L .P . P o rtio ns © 2 0 0 3 . M ic ro so ft C o rp o ra tio n . A ll rig hts re se r v e d . P ro d u ct o f X X X X X X . D is c 1 T h is C D c a n O N L Y b e u s e d w ith a n H P H o m e T h e a t e r P C . R e f e r t o th e p rin te d in s tru c tio n s p ro v id e d w ith y o u r R e c o v e ry C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 HP Home Theater PC System Recovery W indows ® XP Media Center Edition 2004 S u p p o r t fo r M ic r o s o ft p r o d u c ts is p r o v i d e d b y H P . For distribution only with a new PC. © 2 0 0 3 -2 0 0 4 H e w le tt- P a c ka rd D e ve lo p m e n t C o m p a n y , L. P . P o rtio n s © 2 0 0 3 . M i cr o s o ft C o rp o ra tio n . A ll rig h ts r e s e rve d . P ro d u c t o f X X X X X X . Disc 1 T h is C D c a n O N L Y b e u s e d w ith a n H P H o m e T h e a te r P C . R e f e r to th e p r i n te d in s tr u c tio n s p r o v id e d w i th y o u r R e c o v e r y C D s . H P 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8
30 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cables Included Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center comes with the following cables. Additional cables are sold separately . See âOptional Cables Not Includedâ on page 31 for additional cables that you may need. Cable Name Description Stereo RCA, red and white ends. Used for Audio Out. DVI-D Digital video out. Connect to DVI-I or DVI-D input of the HDTV - capable TV or monitor . S-video Black. Used for Video Out. Coaxial digital audio S/PDIF . Used for Digital Audio Out. Infrared T ransmitter (2 with dual-tuner option) IR Blaster cable. Used for set-top boxes. Coaxial (2 with dual-tuner option) Used for TV source input from cable set-top boxes or antennas. Coaxial Splitter (dual-tuner option) Used with coaxial cable for VH F and UHF antenna combinations. AC Power Black 125V 10A. 2 Way Splitter
Installation Over view 31 Installation Overview Optional Cables Not Included Y ou might need the following extra cables (these items are sold separately). Cable Name Max quantity Description Stereo and Video (Composite) 4 RCA: Red, white, yellow ends. Used for TV Source In connector . Stereo 8 RCA: Red and white ends. Used for Audio In/Out connectors. Component video 1 RCA: Red, blue, and green ends. Used for progressive scan component video. S-video 4 Y/C, 4-pin. Plug cable into an S-video connector such as S-video Video Out or TV Source In connector . Video (Composite) 4 RCA: Y ellow end. Plug cable into an RCA connector such as composite Video Out or TV Source In connector . S-video to composite video adapter 1 Used with TV source input 2 composite video input. VGA 1 15-pin, D-sub Analog. Used for monitor or HDTV capable TV . Optical digital audio 1 S/PDIF . Used for Digital Audio Out. FireWire (IEEE 1394) digital video in/out 1 1 IEEE 1394 4-pin to 6-pin (back). IEEE 1394 4-pin to 4-pin (front). USB 6 USB 2.0. Used for peripheral device connectors. Ethernet RJ-45 1 Ethernet 10/100/1000. Used for broadband Internet connection. Coaxial Extra lengths Used for TV source input from cable set-top boxes or antennas.
32 HP Digital Entertainment Center Additional equipment Y ou must have the following items to set up and properly operate your HP Digital Entert ainment Center and system (these items are sold separately): â Audio system equipment such as: â A V receiver with speakers â Powered speakers â TV speakers â Monitor speakers â Video equipment such as: â Monitor â TV â Video projector â Video output from cable/satellite box or antenna â UHF/VHF antenna for HDTV A TSC â Broadband Internet equipment such as: â Cable/DSL modem (working connection required for Media Center features, such as downloading the T elevision Program Guide) â Wireless LAN 802.11 b/g network â Clean AC power (surge protector/line conditioner recommended) Additional equipment and cables are sold separately . Y ou may also need the following items (sold separately; available at electronics stor es) to fully set up your HP Digital Entertainment Center , depending on your system audio and video requirements: â Audio/Video/Network cables: See âOptional Cables Not Includedâ on page 31. â Audio Y adapter(s), mini-plug to 2 RCA-plugs (for powered speakers). Connecting cables Obser ve the following guidelines: â Do not plug in the HP Digital Entertainment Center until all connecting cables are installed. â T urn off power to all other equipment before connecting cables. â Connect cables firmly to avoid hum and noise. â Match the color codes, for instance: yellow â video, white â left, red â right.
Connecting Audio Connecting Audio 33 Connecting Audio The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different audio options, so und connections, and speaker configurations. This chapter describes the most typical, and some advanced, audio setup options for connecting Audio Out and Audio In. T o connect TV Source In audio and video, see âConnecting TV Source Inâ on page 71. Y our system may have different components. Speakers, A V receivers, and other equipment are sold separately . Refer to the product documentation for these products. Stereo HP Digital Entertainment Center On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âAudio Over viewâ on page 34 âT ypical Audio Connectionâ on page 38 âTV Audio Connectionâ on page 39 âA V Receiver Audio Connectionâ on page 40 âPowered Speaker Audio Connectionâ on page 48 âAudio In Connectionsâ on page 55 âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56
34 HP Digital Entertainment Center Audio Over view Audio Output Connectors Connector Name Color Description Cable Surround Back Brown: Left Beige: Right Rear speakers in a multichannel audio eight speaker system (7.1). Surround Blue: Left Gray: Right Side speakers in a multichannel audio six or eight speaker system (4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Center Subwoofer Green: Center Purple: Subwoofer Center speaker and subwoofer in a multichannel audio system (5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Front White: Left Red: Right Stereo speakers or front speakers in a multichannel audio system (2.0, 2.1, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 7.1). Coaxial Digital Audio Out Orange Coaxial S/PDIF 5.1 only . See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. Optical Digital Audio Out Gray Optical S/PDIF 5.1 only . See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Audio Out Audio Out HDTV / SDT V ANT . I N A TSC TUNER SURROUND BACK R L SURROUND R L CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R L DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL
Connecting Audio 35 Connecting Audio Sound Connector Jacks The audio connectors are RCA-type jacks that connect from the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV , powered speakers, or an A V receiver . The HP Digital Entertainment Center has separate Audio In connections (analog). The HP Digital Entertainment Center has two Digital Audio Out connections (S/PDIF) that are coaxial and optical. Use analog Audio 7. 1 Pre-out or Digital Audio Out connectors, but not both. Use only one Digital Audio Out connector at a time. The HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter does not have Digital Audio In connections. Speaker T ypes A stereo speaker set is a left-right, two-channel speaker system (sold separately). A multichannel audio speaker system has a subwoofer , left-right front, and left-right surround channels. The system may also include a left-right surround back channel and a center speaker . Surround back speakers are included in more advanced 7.1 systems. A subwoofer provides enhanced bass sounds. The â.1â indicates a subwoofer . For example, 7.1 channels refer to an eight-speaker mode and uses two front speakers (left-right), tw o side speakers (left-right), two rear speakers (left-right), a center speaker , and a subwoofer . See âSpeaker Configurationsâ on page 36 for more information on speaker arrangements. Audio amplifiers The HP Digital Entertainment Center does not supply an amplified audio signal. Y ou can connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to: â Passive speakers connected through a home audio system. A home audio system does not require active speakers because the receiver provides amplification. â Active (powered) speakers directly . An active speaker system must have its own power cord. n If your audio equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the audio equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video.
36 HP Digital Entertainment Center Speaker Configurations Y ou can set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the following supported audio configurations: Speaker system Home audio system description Recommended arrangement See: 2 (stereo) T wo speakers: Left speaker , right speaker â2.0 Home Stereo Installationâ on page 41 Or â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 2.1 T wo speakers: Left speaker , right speaker One subwoofer â2.1 Home Stereo Installationâ on page 42 Or â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 4.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One subwoofer â4.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 43 Or â4.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 50 5.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One center speaker One subwoofer â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Or â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 TV Display Front right speaker Front left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Front right speaker Front left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker
Connecting Audio 37 Connecting Audio 6.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker One rear surround back speaker One center speaker One subwoofer If your 6.1 A V receiver has only 5.1 (6) inputs, see the following: â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Or â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 7.1 T wo front speakers: Left speaker , right speaker T wo side speakers: surround left speaker , surround right speaker T wo rear speakers: surround back left speaker , surround back right speaker One center speaker One subwoofer â7.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 45 Or â7.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 52 If your 7.1 A V receiver has only five inputs, see â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 Digital audio 5.1 Digital speakers or digital input connector on the audio system âDigital Home Theater Audioâ on page 46 Or âDigital Powered Speakersâ on page 53 Speaker system Home audio system description Recommended arrangement See: Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker Surround back speaker TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker Surround back left speaker TV Display TV Display Subwoofer Center speaker Front right speaker Front left speaker Surround right speaker Surround left speaker
38 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical Audio Connection Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. Y ou can set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the following supported audio configurations: Audio system Description See: TV TV , monitor or display direct audio connection with two speakers âTV Audio Connectionâ on page 39 A V receiver Home stereo or home theater audio system with A V receiver and passive speakers âA V Receiver Audio Connectionâ on page 40 Powered speakers Audio system with active speakers âPowered Speaker Audio Connectionâ on page 48 FM FM T uner In âFM Radio Antennaâ on page 56 Headphones Speakers are muted on headphone connection âConnecting Headphonesâ on page 136 Then see: âAudio In Connectionsâ on page 55 âConnecting Video Outâ on page 57 âConfiguring Audioâ on page 136
Connecting Audio 39 Connecting Audio TV Audio Connection Y ou can connect your TV , monitor , or display audio directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center for two-speaker sound. If your TV has multiple inputs, you can use your TV as a switch for audio and video. Connecting TV Audio T o connect a TV , monitor , or display audio directly: â Connect an RCA stereo cable (White: Left; Red: Right) from the HP Di gital Enter tainment Center back panel Audio Out connector to a TV Audio In connector . Refer to the Start Here booklet that came with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . For additional information on connecting the speakers, refer to the documentation that came with your speakers and A V receiver . The following diagram shows a basic TV audio installation: Basic TV audio setup (2.0) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OU T SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VID EO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV AUDIO IN ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
40 HP Digital Entertainment Center A V Receiver Audio Connection Y ou can connect your HP Digital Enter tainment Center to your home stereo or home theater multichannel A V receivers or audio amplifiers using your existing speakers. A V Receiver Equipment Over view Y ou can connect audio and video from the HP Digital Entertainment Center , through an A V receiver , to the TV input. Use this method to connect A V receivers or audio-only home receiver/amplifiers that have standard RCA-type input connectors. Y ou may have to select a front panel button on your A V receiver to switch audio inputs to hear sound. Use the 2.1 configuration for multichannel A V receivers that have only left and right audio inputs. Connecting a home stereo to an HP Digital Entertainment Center typically requires audio cables that are long enough to connect from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the stereo or A V receiver . Additional cables are sold separately . n Y ou can also connect video through your A V receiver or to your TV directly . Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: â2.0 Home Stereo Inst allationâ on page 41 â2.1 Home Stereo Inst allationâ on page 42 â4.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 43 â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44 â7.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 45 Y ou can also use a digital connection. âDigital Home Theater Audioâ on page 46
Connecting Audio 41 Connecting Audio 2.0 Home Stereo Installation The following diagram shows a typical two-channel (2.0) speaker installation that uses passive stereo speakers connected through a home ster eo standard left and right input. This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled CD, DVD, or DVD In. 2.0 audio system connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OU T SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L V IDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDE O Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN 2 Channel AV Receiver LR A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
42 HP Digital Entertainment Center 2.1 Home Stereo Installation The following diagram shows a typical two-channel (2.1) speaker installation that uses passive stereo speakers connected through a home stereo standard left and right input. This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Use this conf iguration for multichannel A V receivers that only left and right audio inputs. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled CD, DVD, or DVD In. 2.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers generate the subwoofer output without a subwoofer input; in this case, you do not need to connect the subwoofer output from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L V IDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDE O Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN LR 2.1 Channel AV Receiver A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Audio 43 Connecting Audio 4.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio four-channel 4/4.1 speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on a receiver/amplifier . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. A V receiver/amplifier audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 4.1 or 4 Channel inputs, CD, DVD, or DVD In. 4.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers generate the subwoofer output without a subwoofer input; in this case, you do not need to connect the subwoofer output from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AUDIO IN 4.1 Channel AV Receiver A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
44 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio six-channel (5.1 ) speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Use this conf iguration for 6.1 and 7.1 A V receivers that upmix the rear speaker(s). Use the 2.1 configuration for 5.1 A V receivers that have only left and right inputs. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. A V receiver audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 5.1 or 6 Channel Inputs, DVD, Ext. In, or Multichannel Inputs. 5.1 multichannel audio system connection n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BAC K SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN AUDIO IN 5.1 Channel AV Receiver
Connecting Audio 45 Connecting Audio 7.1 Home Theater Audio The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio eight-channel (7.1) speaker installation that requires multichannel inputs on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. If your A V receiver suppor ts 7.1 and has only 5.1 inputs, see â5.1 Home Theater Audioâ on page 44. A V receiver audio input connectors may be labeled Surround, 7.1 or 8 Channel inputs, DVD, Ext. In, or Multichannel Inputs. 7.1 multichannel audio system connection n Some A V receivers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 channels. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 A UDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Surr . Back Surround Center Sub Front AUDIO IN 7.1 Channel AV Receiver
46 HP Digital Entertainment Center Digital Home Theater Audio The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts digital audio output. â For TV and music: two-channel stereo. (Y our A V receiver may separate the audio signal into multiple channels.) â For DVD playback: the multiple channel Dolby Digital 5.1 or DTS Digital encoded audio signal passes to your A V receiver for decoding. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. Y ou can connect either the coaxial or the optical digital audio cable, depending on your system. If you have both cables, connect only one cable. Do not connect analog multichannel speaker outputs if you connect the digital output. â Insert optical cords straight in until they click into place. â Do not bend or tie optical cords. T o connect digital audio from your HP Digital Entertainment Center to an A V receiver: 1 Connect the Digital Audio Out connector on the back panel of your HP Digital En tertainment Center to the Digital Input (S/PDIF) on your A V receiver or digital audio system. 2 Select the A V receiver input. 3 Use the A V receiver to adjust the volume. The following diagram shows a typical advanced home theater audio six-channel 5.1 speaker installation that requires a digital input on an A V receiver . This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different, such as having more speakers. n Some A V receivers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 channels. Refer to your A V receiver product documentation. n Both Media Center speaker settings and DVD audio settings must be changed for proper audio setup. Go to âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139 and note your speaker configuration choice for later software setup steps.
Connecting Audio 47 Connecting Audio Digital 5.1 multichannel audio system connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SU RROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Choose one DIGIT AL AUDIO IN Coaxial Optical Digital Audio Out Recommended for best digital audio experience 5.1 Channel AV Receiver
48 HP Digital Entertainment Center Powered Speaker Audio Connection Y ou can connect active (powered) speakers directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . An active speaker system must have its own power cord. Y ou may need Y adapter cables (sold separately). Y adapter cables The HP Digital Entertainment Center has RCA-type output connectors. Y ou may need to connect Y adapter cables between your HP Digital Entertainment Center analog audio output and your powered speaker inputs. Y ou can also use them for audio inputs depending on your equipment. Use Y adapter cables with one female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo mini-jack on one end and two male RCA connectors on the other end. These cables are sold separately . The number of Y adapter cables you need to connect to your home stereo system depends on the number of speakers you install. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: â2.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 49 â4.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 50 â5.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 51 â7.1 Powered Speakersâ on page 52 Y ou can also use a digital connection. âDigital Powered Speakersâ on page 53 Select the cable that most closely matches your home system: 2.1 speaker system: 1 Y adapter cable 4.1 speaker system: 2 Y adapter cables 5.1 speaker system: 3 Y adapter cables 7.1 speaker system: 4 Y adapter cables n Y adapter cables and extension cables are sold separately .
Connecting Audio 49 Connecting Audio 2.1 Powered Speakers T o connect simple left/right stereo (2.0) active speakers: Or T o connect two speakers and a subwoofer for 2.1 speaker output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cable (sold separately) to the Front Right and Front Left Audio Out connectors on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapter cable to the Audio Line In cable of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. 2.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER AC Subwoofer A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
50 HP Digital Entertainment Center 4.1 Powered Speakers T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, and a subwoofer for four-channel (4.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables (sold separately) to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Su rround Right, and Surround Left on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audio Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. 4.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BA CK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Subwoofer AC A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Audio 51 Connecting Audio 5.1 Powered Speakers T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer for six-channel (5.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables (sold separately) to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Surround Right, Surround Left, and Center on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audio Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. T ypical 5.1 powered speaker installation DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Subwoofer Center Speaker AC
52 HP Digital Entertainment Center 7.1 Powered Speakers Y ou can install a 7.1 audio system to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o connect two front speakers, two surround speakers, two surround back speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer for eight-channel (7.1 speaker) output: 1 Connect the RCA connector end of the Y adapter cables to the Audio Out connectors Front Right, Front Left, Center , Surround Right, Surround Left, Surround Back on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the female 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack end of the Y adapters to the Audi o Line In cables of the speaker amplifier . 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. T ypical 7.1 powered speaker installation n Some powered speakers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 input channels. Refer to your product documentation. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Subwoofer Center Speaker AC
Connecting Audio 53 Connecting Audio Digital Powered Speakers Y ou can install a digital audio system with up to two front speakers, two surround speakers, two surround back speakers, a center speaker , and a subwoofer to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Do not connect analog multichannel speaker outputs if you connect the digital output. Y ou can connect either the coax ial or optical digital audio cable, depending on your system. If you have both cables, connect one cable only . â Insert optical cords straight in until they click into place. â Do not bend or tie optical cords. T o connect six-channel (5.1 speaker) di gital output to a speaker digital input: 1 Connect a digital audio coaxial or optical cable to a Digital Audio Out connector on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 Connect the digital audio coaxial or optical cable to the speakers. 3 Plug in the speaker system power . Refer to the speaker documentation. 4 T urn on the speaker system. Digital powered speaker installation (5.1 shown) n Some powered speakers can generate (upmix) the 7.1 audio with 5.1 input channels. Refer to your product documentation. DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SU RROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Choose one DIGIT AL AUDIO IN Coaxial Optical Digital Audio Out ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN
54 HP Digital Entertainment Center Monitor Speakers Y ou can connect powered monitor speakers directly to your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y ou may need Y adapter cables. Yo u c a n : â Connect simple left/right stereo 2.0 powered monitor speakers. Or â C onnect two powered speakers and a subwoofer for 2.1 monitor speaker output. Monitor speaker installation (2.0 shown) n Monitor speaker configurations and connections may vary . Y our system may be different. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VID EO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN Audio Out Monitor
Connecting Audio 55 Connecting Audio Audio In Connections Y ou can connect your existi ng home stereo or home theater audio equipment, such as a tape player or turntable, to your HP Digital Enter tainment Center using the Audio In stereo connectors on the back panel. The Audio In connection can be used in conjunction with sound recording software (application software sold separately) to record audio from other external equipment. The following diagram shows a typical Audio In stereo connection. This is only a su ggested configuration. Y our system may be different. Audio In stereo connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AU DIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK S URROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER OUT or T ape Player T urntable Audio In ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN n A turntable might require special phono inputs through a mixer .
56 HP Digital Entertainment Center FM Radio Antenna The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes an FM radio tuner . T o connect the FM radio antenna: 1 Plug the FM radio antenna cable into the FM (T uner) In connector on the back panel (75-Ohm Coaxial). 2 Y ou may want to extend the ends of the cable to improve your FM radio signal reception. The following diagram shows typical FM antenna connections: â Indoor antenna Or â Rooftop antenna (sold separately) This is only a suggested configuration. Y our system may be different. FM radio antenna cable external or internal connection DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER FM Antenna FM Radio Roof Antenna Choose one ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ANSMITTER OUT 1 2 O S-VIDEO 802.11 b/g ENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN F M ANTENNA IN S-VIDEO 75 ⦠C O AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN N SMITTER OUT 1 2 S-VIDEO 802.11 b/g NA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN - VIDEO 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting Video Out Connecting Video Out 57 Connecting V ideo Out This chapter describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV or display monitor , so you can watch TV and view the screen. It includes the most typical, and some advanced, video output options. Y ou must have a display such as a TV or monitor connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. HP Digital Entertainment Centers support many different video options, connections, and configurations of TVs and monitors. Y our system may have different equipment. TV HP Digital Enter tainment Center On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âVideo Out Overviewâ on page 58 âT ypical Video Out Connectionsâ on page 63 âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64 âVideo Out from A V Receiver to TVâ on page 66 âVideo Out to Monitorâ on page 68 âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69
58 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out Over view V ideo Out Connection Over view The back panel connector that you hook up to your TV is labeled Video Out. Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Standard definition television: â Video (composite) â S-video â Component (Y , Pb, Pr) High definition capable plas ma, LCD, or HDTV display: â Video (composite) â S-video â Component (Y , Pb, Pr) â VGA â DVI Monitor: â VGA â DVI The type of video cable you need depends on your TV : â If your TV has a composite video jack, you may need a composite video cable. â If your TV has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals, and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable does. â For component video, see âComponent Video Settingsâ on page 60. T o connect a TV to the HP Digital Enter tainment Center , you may need a video cable and an audio cable. Use a video cable to connect the Video Out on the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your TV Video In. These cables are included in the box. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your TV or monitor . When using an A V receiver , the Video Out cable can be connected directly to a TV and just the audio is connected and switched through an A V receiver , or video and audio are connected and switched through an A V receiver . When using an A V receiver , do not switch video types such as connecting a Component In to a Composite Out. Not all A V receivers suppor t signal conversion. Some HP Digital Entertainment Center models output NTSC only . n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video.
Connecting Video Out 59 Connecting Video Out V ideo Out Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Cable type Video (composite) RCA jack Y ellow S-video Y/C video 4-pin Black Component (interlaced or progressive scan) See http://www .hp.com/suppor t for instructions on using component video. 3 RCA jacks Green: Y Blue: Pb Red: Pr VGA Analog: 15-pin D-sub Vid eo Out Blue DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER A TSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y Pb Pr COMPONENT OUT VGA
60 HP Digital Entertainment Center Component V ideo Settings Y ou must configure settings to view component video on your TV properly . Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. Overview Y ou must change the default desktop resolution of 800 x 600 to 640 x 480 for the best DVD playback and Media Center experience. A resolution of 800 x 600 is best for Windows desktop dialog boxes. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. The component video default output is 480i (interla ced) to provide a picture on most TVs. Driver adjustments are required to configure progressive scan for TVs that support progressive scan. Progressive scan format provides a better desktop viewing experience than interlaced format. Content-protected DVD playback is limited to the following when component video is connected: Digital Video Out (DVI) Digital: 29-pin D-sub DVI-I Or Analog: Vid eo Ou t White Item Connector T ype Color Cable type DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI n HP recommends initial setup using VGA or composite video. Component format Desktop resolution 480i (interlaced) 640 x 480 @ 30 Hz 480p (progressive) 640 x 480 @ 60 Hz
Connecting Video Out 61 Connecting Video Out TV Display Over view The HP Digital Entertainment Center allows you to connect to a TV to view the monitor image on a TV screen. With the TV connected, you can view the HP Digital Entertainment Center image, watch TV or DVD movies, or play games on your TV . See âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69. Y ou must manually set up dual displays (clone). Only either the TV or monitor , not both, will display after initial turn on. See âDual screenâ on page 142. Audio and V ideo Switching Over view A V receiver: Y ou can use your A V receiver as a switch to direct the video to your TV and the audio to your speakers from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . This method gives you the best audio quality , and is easy to switch audio/video inputs though your A V receiver remote. If your A V receiver has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output on the A V receiver front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. TV : If you have multiple audi o/video inputs on your TV , you can use your TV as an audio/video switch and control inputs though your TV remote. If your TV has multiple input connections, then it has a front panel input switch. Y ou must select the correct input and output on the TV front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. Monitor: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your monitor , you can use your monitor as an audio/ video switch. Y ou will probably not be able to use a remote control to switch. If your monitor has multiple input and output connections, then it has a front panel inpu t switch and output switch. Y ou must select the correc t input and output on the monitor front panel to hear sound and see video. n If your video equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the video equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video.
62 HP Digital Entertainment Center Using the Remote Contr ol with Y our TV Y ou can use the HP Digital Enter tainment Center remote control to change channels and adjust volume if you have a cable box or satellite receiver , have installed the Infrared T ransmitter cable, and have configured the remote control after initial turn on. Always point the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control at the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel. The infrared remote sensor , behind the front panel window , receives signals from the remote control. The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes one or two Infrared T ransmitter cables (IR blaster) that are required to control one or two set-top boxes. Y ou must carefully position the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip on the set-top box to ensure the set-top box receives the IR signal from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âInfrared T ransmitter Installationâ on page 99.
Connecting Video Out 63 Connecting Video Out T ypical V ideo Out Connections This section describes how to hook up the Video Out connectors on the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center into your home system so you can watch TV . These are only suggested co nfigurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. Y ou may set up your HP Digital Enter tainment Ce nter for the following supported configurations: Display/video configuration See: From HP Digital Entertainment Center to TV through a direct connection âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64 From HP Digital Entertainment Center through an A V receiver , to a TV âVideo Out from A V Receiver to TVâ on page 66 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to a monitor through a direct connection âVideo Out to Monitorâ on page 68 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to a TV and monitor , dual-display option (Y ou must manually set dual displays.) âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69 Other Video Equipment âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101 Then see: âConnecting TV Source Inâ on page 71 âConfiguring Videoâ on page 141
64 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out to TV Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your TV , you can use your TV as an audio/video switch and control inputs though your TV remote. Connectors: Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Equipment: The TV and some cables are sold separately . Refer to the documentation that came with your TV/display . Y ou can also connect a video projector using this procedure. Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV display , after initial turn on, using the Media Center software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: Connect a video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the TV Video In. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. n If the S-video and composite Video Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks turn off automatically and you see no picture. Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center .
Connecting Video Out 65 Connecting Video Out . DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUD IO 7.1 PRE -OUT SURROUND BACK SUR ROUND CE NTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER S-video Component * Video TV IN Choose one * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURRO UND BAC K SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VID EO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER ATSC TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN S-video Component * Video Choose one VGA HDTV IN DVI * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. Video out to standard TV Video out to high-definition capable HDTV
66 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out fr om A V Receiver to TV Switching: Switch audio and video through your A V receiver if your A V receiver switches video and has the correct connections. This method gives you the best audio quality , and you can easily switch audio/video inputs through your A V receiver remote. Connectors: Choose a Video Out connector and corresponding cable that attaches to the back of your TV : Equipment: The TV , A V receiver , and some cables are sold separately . See the documentation that came with your TV and A V receiver . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV display , after initial turn on, using the Media Center software settings. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: 1 Connect a video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out to the AV r e c e i v e r V i d e o I n . 2 Connect a video cable from the A V receiver Video Out to the TV Video In. Use the same connector type if your A V receiver does not support cross-connecting. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI n If the S-video and composite Video Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatically . Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center . If your TV and A V receiver has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the TV and A V receiver front panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video.
Connecting Video Out 67 Connecting Video Out . TV Out (through A V receiver) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7 .1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUN D CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Video Choose one Component * TV IN A V RECEIVER IN Choose one and keep same type as A V Receiver In S-video Video Component * S-video A V RECEIVER OUT A V Receiver * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. * Note: Not recommended for initial setup. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
68 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Out to Monitor Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on your monitor , you can use your monitor as an audio/ video switch. Y ou will probably not be able to use a remote control as a switch. Connectors: For a monitor , choose one of the following Video Out connectors and cables: â VGA â DVI Equipment: The monitor and some cables may not be included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See the documentation that came with your monitor . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the monitor display , after initial turn on, using th e Media Center software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: Connect a monitor video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the monitor Video In. Monitor out DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Choose one VGA MONITOR IN DVI HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER n If your monitor has multiple input connections, then it has a front panel input switch. Y ou must select the correct input from the monitor front panel or remote contr ol to hear sound and see video.
Connecting Video Out 69 Connecting Video Out V ideo Out to TV and Monitor Switching: If you have multiple audio/video inputs on y ou r T V or mo n it or, y ou c an us e yo u r T V o r mo ni t or as a n audio/video switch. Y ou can use a TV remote control to switch inputs. If your A V receiver switches video and has the correct connections, you can connect your TV or monitor through your A V receiver . Connectors: Choose Video Out connectors and corresponding cables that atta ch to the back of your TV and monitor: Y ou can use the following combinations to connect your TV and monitor: Y ou cannot view any combination of Video (composite), S-video, or Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Video Out at the same time with dual displays. Equipment: The TV , monitor , and some cables may not be included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See the documentation that came with your TV and monitor . Configuration: Y ou can adjust the TV and monitor displays, after initial turn on, using the Media Center . software. See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. Procedure: 1 Connect a monitor video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Video Out directly to the monitor Video In. Use the VGA or DVI V ideo Out connectors. 2 Connect your TV to the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel. Use the Video (composite), S-video, or Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Video Out connectors for standard definition TVs. 3 After initial turn on, you will need to activate dual displays. See âDual screenâ on page 142. Standard definition TV High definition display Monitor Vid eo (composite) Vid eo (composite) S-video S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA VGA DVI DVI Display Use with VGA V ideo (composite) S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) DVI DVI Video (composite) S-video Component (Y , Pb, Pr) VGA n If the S-video and Video (composite) V ideo Out connections are not connected to a TV or video input when the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatically . Y ou must restar t to ensure Video Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . Press and hold down the On/Standby (power) button for 4 seconds to turn off your HP Digital Entertainment Center . After it shuts down, press the On/Standby button to turn on your HP Digital Entertainment Center .
70 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV (standard definition shown) and monitor out n Component video output requires specific configurations for certain display types and resolutions. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for instructions on using component video. n If your TV or monitor has multiple input connections, select the correct input on the TV or monitor . DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUN D BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV IN VGA MONITOR IN DVI S-video Component Video Choose one Choose one HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In Connecting TV Source In 71 Connecting TV Source In This chapter describes how to connect TV source input from a set-top box such as a cable box or satellite receiver to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Infrared T ransmitter cable installation is also included. Y ou connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to an existing setup for your TV signal source. This chapter includes the most typical, and some advanced, input options. The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different video source input options, connections, and set-top-box configurations, such as a cable box or satellite receiver . Y our home system may have different components. Cable Set-top box Infrared T ransmitter HP Digital Entertainment Center On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âTV Source Over viewâ on page 72 âT ypical TV Source Connectionsâ on page 78 âAntenna Connectionâ on page 80 âCable Connectionâ on page 83 âSatellite Connectionâ on page 93 âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97 n For additional information on connecting the cable box or satellite receiver , refer to the documentation that came with your equipment and the Start Here booklet included.
72 HP Digital Entertainment Center TV Source Over view TV Signal Source Over view Y ou must connect a TV signal to the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. Y ou can attach standard, analog NTSC TV and high-definition, digital HDTV A TSC sources. The back panel TV Source connectors are: â TV Source 1 In â TV Source 2 In â Cable/antenna In (NTSC) RF â HDTV/SDTV Ant. In (A TSC) RF antenna NTSC Standard TV The NTSC back panel connectors are TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In: â For an NTSC cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver use TV Source 1 In or TV Source 2 In (select models only). â For an NTSC analog cable RF coaxial connector use Cable/antenna In. For dual-tuner systems, the Cable/antenna In RF connector splits internally . A set-top cable TV box is provided by your cable TV provider to unscramble premium channels. For Dual T uner configurations, both TV sources must be of the same type: either cable TV , digital cable TV , satellite TV , or antenna. The TV sources must also have the same, identical channel lineup; for example, if you are using two satellite TV sources they must provide the exact same channels. All TV viewing and scheduling is provided through the T elevision Program Guide in Media Center , so both TV sources must have identical T elevision Program Guides. The HP Digital Entertainment Center records television and allows you to control th e television channels. The HP Digital Entertainment Center has two tuner configurations available: n An A TSC tuner that supports high-definition TV is included with select HP Digital Entertainment Center models only . Single-tuner TV Source 1 In A single tuner allows you to watch or record one program only in NTSC. Dual-tuner option TV Source 2 In Y ou can have dual TV inputs, if your HP Digital Entertainment Center includes the two TV tuner option. Y ou can watch a show on one channel while Media Center records another show on a different channel. Or you can record two different programs at the same time, using two tuners in NTSC.
Connecting TV Source In 73 Connecting TV Source In A TSC high-definition TV If your HP Digital Entertainment Center includes an optional HDTV/SDTV Ant. In tuner card and dual NTSC tuner card configuration, you can view and record A TSC channels. Media Center supports over-the-air A TSC digital TV . Over-the-air A TSC digital TV requires a UHF/VHF antenna (sold separately) to receive the digital signal. Y our location must be within an HDTV A TSC broadcast area. The A TSC high-definition DTV (Digital TV) source back panel connector is as follows: â HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connected to a UHF/VHF antenna. See the following section for more information on HDTV . Then see the instructions to install HDTV A TSC. Connecting an A TSC antenna Y ou can attach an indoor or outdoor UHF/VHF antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center to watch HDTV A TSC through the VHF or UHF channels. A UHF/VHF antenna receives HDTV A TSC channels, depending on the quality (gain) of the antenna, geographic location, and broadcast reception strength. An internal or external roof antenna is sold separately . Y ou might have to reposition the antenna for best reception. Position the antenna based on the following general criteria: â Higher; the ideal position is above the roofline. â Closer to or facing the broadcast tower . â Larger for stronger signals. â Outdoor for less interference. Refer to http://www .antennaweb.or g for more information about: â The channels available in your area. The channels may be color coded by zone. â Selecting the kind of antenna you need depending on the channels you want to receive. Match your antenna to your zone. â The direction to point your antenna. â Positioning an HDTV antenna for best reception. n Y ou can also attach an internal or external roof VHF antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center to watch NTSC channels.
74 HP Digital Entertainment Center Additional HDTV Information What is HDTV? HDTV (High-definition T elevision) is the highest quality DTV standard. HDTV provides increased picture detail (720p, 1080i) with a widescreen16:9 aspect ratio and higher quality audio such as surround sound, on a display that supports digital TV . HDTV/SDTV Ant. In is the connector on the back of your HP Digital Entertainment Center that you connect the A TSC signal to. SDTV (Standard-definition T elevision) is the lowest quality DTV standard. AT S C (Advanced T elevision Systems Committee) is the official name of the DTV picture format that is in use in the United States and North America. The tuner inside your HP Digital Entertainment Center is A TSC-capable. DTV (Digital T elevision) is the umbrella term used to describe the new digital television way of transmitting television signals. DTV includes many formats of high- definition TV that can broadcast an image resolution of up to 2 million pixels. NTSC (National T elevision Systems Committee) is standard (analog) TV . Standa rd TV broadcasts an image resolution of about 210,000 pixels and is distributed today through antenna, cable, digital cable, or satellite. About digital TV in Media Center Digital TV for Windows ® XP Media Center Edition 2005 is available in the United States only . Refer to the Readme for Update 1 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 with HDTV for all digital TV requirements. Refer to the Microsoft W eb site at: http://www .microsoft.com
Connecting TV Source In 75 Connecting TV Source In TV Source Connectors Over view Y our standard television set- top box has one or more of the following video output connectors and cables: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video Do not switch video types such as connecting S-video In to TV Source 1 and Composite Video In to TV Source 2 or a Coaxial In and a Composite Out. Not all set-top boxes and A V receivers suppor t signal conversion. The type of video cable you need depends on your set- top box: â If your set-top box has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable to connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to your set-top box. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals, and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable. â If your set-top box has a composite video jack, you need a composite video cable. â If you are connecting dual NTSC set-top box sources to the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual NTSC tuner with an composite video connection, use a composite to S-video adapter (sold separately) on TV Source 2 in. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your TV signal source. Connecting a set-top box A standard cable set-top bo x has only NTSC channels, but you can connect a UHF/VHF antenna to view HDTV A TSC channels also. A set-top cable TV box is provided by your cable TV provider to unscramble premium channels. Y ou cannot record digital TV if using the HP Digital Entertainment Center with an HDTV cable box or HDTV satellite box. Use an antenna to record digital TV . If you can receive HDTV channels through cable or satellite providers, connect the signal directly to your TV/display . Refer to your TV/display documentation.
76 HP Digital Entertainment Center TV Source Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Item Connector T ype Color Cable Audio TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Video (composite) TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow S-video (4-pin) TV Source 1 In Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black Cable/Antenna In With internal splitter to dual-tuners Coaxial Silver Audio TV Source 2 In (Select models only) RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER TV SOURCE 1 AUDIO R L S-VIDEO VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN F M DUAL TUNER TV SOURCE 2 AUDIO R L
Connecting TV Source In 77 Connecting TV Source In Additional cables to install the HP Digita l Entertainment Center are sold separately . S-video TV Source 2 In (select models only) Y/C video Analog 4-pin Black HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Coaxial (from UHF/ VHF antenna) Silver Infrared T ransmitter Out 2 por ts: 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jacks Silver Item Connector T ype Color Cable 2 IN S-VIDEO HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER O UT 1 2
78 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical TV Source Connections These are only suggested configuratio ns. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: TV source type Display/video configuration Connector See: Antenna Standard NTSC from UHF/VHF antenna Cable/Ant. In âAntenna (NTSC)â on page 80 HDTV A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âAntenna (A TSC)â on page 81 NTSC from UHF/VHF antenna AT S C f r o m U H F / V H F a n t e n n a Cable/Ant. In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âAntenna (NTSC and A TSC)â on page 82 NTSC cable and A TSC antenna NTSC analog cable directly from the wall (without a set-top box) and A TSC from UHF/ VHF antenna Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âCable (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 83 One NTSC cable TV set-top box and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Or Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. in âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 84 T wo NTSC cable TV set-top boxes and A TSC from UHF/ VHF antenna TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e R e c e i v e r s (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 86 NTSC digital cable or satellite and A TSC antenna One NTSC digital cable or satellite receiver and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In Or Cable/Ant. In and HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 84 T wo NTSC digital cable or satellite receivers and A TSC from UHF/VHF antenna TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e R e c e i v e r s (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC)â on page 86
Connecting TV Source In 79 Connecting TV Source In NTSC cable Cable directly from the wall (without a cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver) Cable/Ant. In âCable Only (NTSC)â on page 88 One cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver TV Source 1 In Or Cable/Ant. In âOne Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC)â on page 89 T wo cable TV set-top boxes, or digital cable receivers TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In âT wo Cable TV Boxes, or Tw o D i g i t a l C a b l e Receiversâ on page 91 NTSC satellite One satellite receiver TV Source 1 In Or Cable/Ant. In âOne Satellite Receiver (NTSC)â on page 93 T wo satellite receivers TV Source 1 In TV Source 2 In âT wo Satellite Receivers (NTSC)â on page 95 NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite One NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite receiver TV Source 1 In (to record HDTV in standard format) Connect the cable A TSC signal directly to your TV/ display to view HDTV . Refer to the TV/display documentation. T wo NTSC and A TSC digital cable or satellite receivers TV Source 1 In and TV Source 2 In (to record HDTV in standard format) Connect the cable A TSC signal directly to your TV/ display to view HDTV . Refer to the TV/display documentation. Then see: âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97 (cable TV bo x, digital cable receiver , or satellite receiver only) âConnecting Video Equipmentâ on page 101 TV source type Display/video configuration Connector See:
80 HP Digital Entertainment Center Antenna Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Antenna (NTSC) : TV signal source â TV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Roof TV Antenna Coaxial HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER VHF Antenna UHF Antenna I f you are using a NTSC UHF / VHF b roa d cast te l evision antenna (sold separately) with no cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver , do the following to connect the TV signal source: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your external or internal TV antenna into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 81 Connecting TV Source In Antenna (A TSC) : TV signal source â HDTV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER Roof TV Antenna Coaxial VHF Antenna UHF Antenna T o connect an HDTV signal source to your HP Digital Entertainment Center , do the following: 1 Connect a coaxial cable from your UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
82 HP Digital Entertainment Center Antenna (NTSC and A TSC) HDTV and standard signal source â TV antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN 1 DTV AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL Roof Antenna Coaxial Splitter 2 Way Splitter VHF Antenna UHF Antenna If you are using a VHF and UHF broadcast television antenna (sold separately) with no cable TV box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver , do the following to connect the NTSC and A TSC TV signal source to your HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Install a splitter (provided) as shown in the following illustration (select models only). Connect the splitter input to the antenna (outdoor shown). 2 Connect two coaxial cables to the splitter outputs. T urn the connectors to tighten them. 3 Connect a coaxial cable into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T u rn the connector to tighten it. 4 Connect a coaxial cable into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 83 Connecting TV Source In Cable Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Cable (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) . TV signal source NTSC cable and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVIT Y LINK CABLE /ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER UHF Antenna Cable From W all Coaxial VHF Antenna Coaxial Roof Antenna T o connect standard cable without a set-top box and a HDTV/SDTV Ant. In input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center , do the following to connect the NTSC and A TSC TV signal sources: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your TV cable (wall) into the Cable/Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. 3 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 T urn the connector to tighten it. CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
84 HP Digital Entertainment Center One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) T o connect a standard set-top box (sold separately) and an HDTV/SDTV Ant. In input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center using a standard set-top box, satellite receiver , or digital cable receiver with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your cable TV source (wall) is plugged into the set-top box or digital cable receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable: a Choose a video out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Video Output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 Connect the set-top box Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
Connecting TV Source In 85 Connecting TV Source In . TV signal source â one cable TV or digital cable box (NTSC) and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER OUT TV Source 1 Video Coaxial Coaxial S-video Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter Choose one Cable W all Coaxial Roof TV Antenna VHF Antenna UHF Antenna
86 HP Digital Entertainment Center T wo Cable TV Boxes, or T wo Digital Cable Receivers (NTSC) and Antenna (A TSC) Y ou must have two identical set-top boxes â such as two digital cable receivers, two satellite receivers, or two cable TV boxes (sold separately) â from the same TV source and the HP Digital Ente rtainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the NTSC TV signal source from each set-top box or digital cable receiver in to each of the HP Digital Entertainment Center tunersâ TV Source 1 and TV Source 2. If you are using two matching set-top cable boxes, with S-video or composite video ou tput, do the following to connect two tuners and a HDTV A TSC input to your HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Make sure that: â Cable TV box: A coaxial cable connector from your cable source (wall) is plugged into a cable splitter (provided), then into each cable set-top box In connector . This setup is similar to the illustration âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. â Digital cable receiver: A coaxial cable connector from two cable sources (wall) is plugged into each digital cable receiver IN connector . See âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. 2 Connect a video cable for set-top box 1. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for set-top box 2: a Choose a video out connector; use the same type as set-top box 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 6 Connect the coaxial cable from the UHF/VHF antenna into the HDTV/SDTV Ant. In connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center .
Connecting TV Source In 87 Connecting TV Source In 7 Connect the set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 8 Connect the set-top box 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two cable boxes (NTSC) and A TSC UHF/VHF antenna DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter Source 1 Video Set-top box 1 Coaxial Set-top box 2 Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Video S-video W all Cable W all Cable Coaxial Coaxial S-video Choose one Choose one Roof TV Antenna VHF Antenna UHF Antenna HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
88 HP Digital Entertainment Center Cable Only (NTSC) If you are using a standard ca ble without a set-top box or digital cable receiver , do th e following to connect the NTSC-only TV signal source: 1 Plug the connector of a coaxial cable from your TV cable (wall) into the Cable/Ant connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . This connection supplies the TV signal source for both TV tuners. 2 T urn the connector to tighten it. . TV signal source (NTSC cable) CABLE/ANT . IN DUAL TUNER DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Cable W all Coaxial HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 89 Connecting TV Source In One Cable TV Box or Digital Cable Receiver (NTSC) Connect the NTSC TV signal source from the standard cable TV set-top box or digital cable receiver (sold separately) into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you are using a standard set-top box or digital cable receiver with S-video or co mposite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your cable TV source (wall) is plugged into the set-top box or digital cable receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable: a Choose a video out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Video Output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the set-top box Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
90 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV signal source â one cable TV or digital cable box (NTSC) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNE R OUT TV Source 1 Video Coaxial S-video Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter Choose one Cable From W all Coaxial
Connecting TV Source In 91 Connecting TV Source In T wo Cable TV Boxes, or T wo Digital Cable Receivers Y ou must have two identical set-top boxes, such as two digital cable receivers or two cable TV boxes (sold separately), from the same TV source and the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the TV signal source from each set-top box or digital cable receiver into each of the HP Digital Entertainment Center tunersâ TV Source 1 and TV Source 2. If you are using two matching set-top cable boxes or digital cable receivers with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that: â Cable TV box: A coaxial cable connector from your cable source (wall) is plugged into a cable splitter (provided), then into each cable set-top box In connector . This setup is similar to the illustration âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. â Digital cable receiver: A coaxial cable connector from two cable sources (wall) is plugged into each digital cable receiver IN connector . See âTV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC)â on page 92. 2 Connect a video cable for set-top box 1. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for set-top box 2: a Choose a video out connector; use the same type as set-top box 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the set-top box or digital cable receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for set-top box 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the set-top box or digital cable receiver back Audio Out right (red) and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors.
92 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 Connect the set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 7 Connect the set-top box 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two digital cable boxes (NTSC) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter Source 1 Video Set-top box 1 Cable From W all Cable From W all Coaxial Set-top box 2 Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Video S-video Coaxial S-video Choose one Choose one HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 93 Connecting TV Source In Satellite Connection (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) One Satellite Receiver (NTSC) Connect the TV signal source from the satellite receiver into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . If you are using a satellite receiver (sold separately) with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your dish source is plugged into the satellite receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable. a Choose a Video Out connector: â Coaxial (RF) â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect the satellite receiver Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97.
94 HP Digital Entertainment Center . TV signal source â one satellite receiver (NTSC) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVI TY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A N TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNE R TV Source 1 Video Coaxial S-video Choose one OUT Infrared T ransmitter Coaxial Satellite Receiver HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 95 Connecting TV Source In T wo Satellite Receivers (NTSC) Y ou must have two identical satellite receivers from the same source and the HP Digital Entertainment Center dual-tuner option (select models only) to set this up. This configuration will allow you to watch live TV on one channel and record another channel at the same time. Connect the TV signal source from each satellite receiver into each HP Digital Entertainment Center tuner . If you are using two matching satellite receivers with S-video or composite video output, do the following: 1 Make sure that a coaxial cable connector from your dish source is plugged into two cable outputs, and each satellite receiver In connector . 2 Connect a video cable for satellite receiver 1: a Choose a Video Out connector: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In connector . 3 Connect stereo audio cables for satellite receiver 1 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and the Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 1 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors. 4 Connect a video cable for satellite receiver 2: a Choose a video out connector , use the same type as satellite receiver 1: â Video (composite) â S-video b Connect the video cable from the satellite receiver back panel video output connector . c Connect the video cable into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In connector . 5 Connect stereo audio cables for satellite receiver 2 (skip this step if using coaxial [RF]): a From the satellite receiver back panel Audio Out right (red) connector and Audio Out left (white) connectors. b Into the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel TV Source 2 In Audio right (red) and Audio left (white) connectors.
96 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 Connect the satellite receiver 1 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. 7 Connect the satellite receiver 2 Infrared T ransmitter cable (required for signal). See âInfrared T ransmitter Connectionâ on page 97. . TV signal source â two satellite re ceivers (NTSC) (select models only) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTE R OUT 1 2 TV SOUR CE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L W IRELESS LAN 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Source 1 Video Choose one Note: Connect same set-top box only VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Source 2 Choose one Video S-video Infrared T ransmitter S-video Satellite Receiver 1 Satellite Receiver 2 Coaxial (RF) HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 97 Connecting TV Source In Infrared T r ansmitter Connection Infrared T ransmitter Over view The HP Digital Entertainment Center includes infrared transmitters that make it easy to control one or two set-top boxes. If you connect a set-top box such as a digital cable box or a satellite receiver to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , then you must also use the Infrared (IR) T ransmitter control cable. The remote contr ol sends commands to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , which relays these commands via the Infrared T ransmitter contro l cables to the cable box or satellite receiver . The Infrared T ransmitter control cable has a sender tip (IR Blaster) that attaches to the front of the cable box (or other set-top box) and plugs into the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Y ou must carefully position the Infrared Tr ansmitter control cable sender tip on to the set-top box front panel to ensure the set-top box receives the signal. The remote receiver is on the front of the cable box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver . It receives Infrared commands from your cable box remote control or from the Infrared T ransmitter cable. The remote receiver is sometimes hidden behind a panel of dark, transparent plastic. Y ou can use a flashlight to locate it. For more information about the remote receiver , refer to the documentation for your cable box, digital cable box, or satellite receiver . n The Infrared T ransmitter connection is required for a signal with a set-top box.
98 HP Digital Entertainment Center Infrared T ransmitter connection (one set-top box) Infrared T ransmitter connection (two set-top boxes; select models only) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Set-top box 1 Infrared T ransmitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Set-top box 1 Set-top box 2 Note: Connect set-top box only Infrared T ransmitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting TV Source In 99 Connecting TV Source In Infrared T ransmitter Installation If you have a cable TV receiver , satellite receiver , or other set-top box that controls your TV signal, connect the Infrared T ransmitter sensor: 1 Route the Infrared T ransmitter cable from the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the cable TV , digital cable, or satellite receiver set-top box. 2 Locate the IR remote receiver area on the front of the set-top box. This is where you aim the set-top box remote control to change channels, change the sound level, and so on. â The IR remote receiver area may be behind an obvious window on the set-top box. â Use the set-top box remote control to locate its IR remote receiver area: Hold the remote control ver y close (within 1 inch/2.54 centimeters) and press a remote button to change the channel or power off the box. As you push a button, gradually move the remote control across the front of the box until the box responds. â Hold a flashlight close to the front of the set-top box, and look for a transparent window with a small box inside. T est the area by holding the box remote close to the window and pushing a button until the box responds. 3 Use a piece of tape to temporarily hold the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip over the set-top box IR remote receiver area while you test the function. 4 Plug the Infrared T ransmitter cable into the Infrared T ransmitter connector on the back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 T est the operation by po inting the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control at the HP Digital Entertainment Center IR receiver and pressing a channel button. (Be sure you use the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote and point it at the HP Digital Entertainment Center .) 6 For permanent attachment, remove the paper from the Infrared T ransmitter cable tip, and press the tip onto the IR remote receiver area on the set-top box. 7 Repeat these steps for the second set-top box.
100 HP Digital Entertainment Center The following illustration shows the Infrared T ransmitter installation. Infrared transmitter to cable, digital cabl e receiver , or satellite receiver set-top box DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Infrared T ransmitter ATSC TUNE R Attach to IR window Remove tape Cable or Satellite Set-top box HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN
Connecting V ideo Equipment Connecting Video Equipment 101 Connecting V ideo Equipment This chapter describes how to connect video playback and recording equipment to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Equipment includes VCRs and camcorders. This chapter also includes the most typical, and some advanced, options. The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different video input and audi o/video output options and connections. Y our system may have different components. On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Digital Entertainment Center VCR Chapter Contents: âVideo Equipment Overviewâ on page 102 âT ypical Video Equipment Connectionsâ on page 104 âVCR Connectionâ on page 105 âVideo Camera Connectionâ on page 109 w A stable image on your TV/display may cause screen burn-in if left on for a long time. Use a screen-saver and low contrast colors for desktop background images to reduce burn-in.
102 HP Digital Entertainment Center V ideo Equipment Over view Connectors (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Additional cables and the S-video to composite adapter are sold separately . Item Connector T ype Color Cable Audio: TV Source 1 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right Vid eo : TV Source 1 In RCA jack Y ellow S-video TV : Source 1 In Analog: Y/C video 4-pin Black Cable/Antenna In With internal splitter to dual-tuners Coaxial Silver Audio: TV Source 2 In RCA jacks White: Left Red: Right S-video TV Source 2 In (Select models only) Use S-video to composite adapter to connect composite video Analog: Y/C video 4-pin (optional) Black DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTE NNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER TV SOURCE 1 AUDIO R L VIDEO S-VIDEO CABLE/ANT . IN F M DUAL TUNER TV SOURCE AUDIO R L 2 IN S-VIDEO
Connecting Video Equipment 103 Connecting V ideo Equipment V ideo Equipment Connection Over view Standard video equipment has one or more of the following video out connectors and cables: â Coaxial (RF) â Composite â S-video The type of video cable you need depends on your video equipment: â If your video equipment has an S-video jack, you need an S-video cable. An S-video cable provides separate color and black-and-white image signals and delivers a sharper image than a composite video cable does. â If your video equipment ha s a composite video jack, you need a composite video cable. Y ou may need other or additional cables, depending on your video equipment. Y ou can also connect your digital video camera to work with the HP Digital Entertainment Center through FireWire (IEEE 1394) connectors. DVD player The HP Digital Entertainment Center has a built-in DVD player/recorder . n If your video equipment has multiple input and output connections, then it has front panel input and output switches. Y ou must select the correct input and output from the video equipment fr ont panel or remote control to hear sound and see video. 1394 n The HP Digital Entertainment Center is intended for legal purposes only and not designed to record retail movie title DVDs. n Connect video game boxes directly to your TV .
104 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical V ideo Equipment Connections This section describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to an ex isting setup of your video equipment. These are only suggested configurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: TV source type Display/video configuration See: VCR VCR direct to HP Digital Entertainment Center âVCR Direct In Connectionâ on page 105 From HP Digital Entertainment Center to VCR to TV âW all to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cableâ on page 106 Camcorder Digital âConnecting a Digital Video Camcorderâ on page 109 Analog âConnecting an Analog Camcorderâ on page 112 Then see: âConnecting the Networkâ on page 113 âInitial Configurationâ on page 127
Connecting Video Equipment 105 Connecting V ideo Equipment VCR Connection VCR Direct In Connection Y ou can connect a VCR to record your tapes to th e HP Digital Enter tainment Center hard disk drive. VCR connection n The HP Digital Entertainment Center is intended for legal purposes only . Some retail VHS tapes have content protection measures that do not allow recording. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Video S-video Choose one OUT Coaxial VCR Note: Do not connect audio cables if connecting coaxial cable. HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
106 HP Digital Entertainment Center W all to VCR to TV Using Coaxial Cable 1 Remove the coaxial cable at the input to the VCR. 2 Connect the coaxial cable to the input of a signal splitter (available at electronics stores). 3 Connect two coaxial cables to the splitter outputs. 4 Connect one coaxial cable to the input of the VCR. 5 Connect one coaxial cable to the TV Source 1 in back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 6 Connect a coaxial cable from the VCR out to one of the TV inputs. Reserve an input connection on the TV for the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Existing setups with and without set-top box Cable From W all Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Cable From W all Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Set-top box
Connecting Video Equipment 107 Connecting V ideo Equipment W all to VCR to TV using coaxial cable (Add the HP Digital Enter tainment Center with a splitter) DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUD IO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VI DEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIV ITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER TV IN 2 TV IN 1 VCR IN VCR OUT Coaxial Coaxial TV VCR Coaxial Coaxial W all Splitter 2 W ay Splitter HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
108 HP Digital Entertainment Center W all to set-top box VCR to TV using coaxial cable (add with a splitter) DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FR ONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VI DEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/ g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTI VITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM AN TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER VCR IN VCR OUT W all Coaxial Splitter Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial Set-top box 2 Way Splitter Coaxial CABLE IN TV IN 2 TV IN 1 CABLE OUT Infrared T ransmitter TV VCR HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting Video Equipment 109 Connecting V ideo Equipment V ideo Camera Connection Refer to the HP support W eb site for detailed information on advanced video setup. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number . See âHP W eb Site Supportâ on page 171. Connecting a Digital V ideo Camcorder Connectors: Use the 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the front or 6-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the back panel of the HP Digital Entertainment Center to connect a digital video camera. This connector is bi-directional. Some cameras use a USB connector . See the documentation that came with your digital video camera. See âUSB Device Connectionâ on page 121. Equipment: Most digital video cameras use either a 4-pin to 4-pin or a 4-pin to 6-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) video camera transfer cable. A 4-pin to 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) cable to use the 4-pin FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel is sold separately . Procedure: The following instructions ap ply only to digital video cameras. See âConnecting an Analog Camcorderâ on page 112 for analog video cameras. If a Digital Video Device Auto Play window appears when you connect your camera, click Cancel. T o connect a digital video camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and wait for the desktop to appear . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Tu r n o n t h e d i g i t a l v i d e o c a m e r a . 3 Connect the video camera transfer cable from the camera to a FireWire (IEEE 1394) connector on the front (4-pin) or back (6-pin) of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 A Found New Hardware message appears. W ait two or three minutes for the system to make the necessar y settings for the new device. When installation is complete, a message appears telling you the camera is ready to use.
110 HP Digital Entertainment Center . Connect a digital video camcorder (front panel) Connect a digital video camcorder (back panel) On / Standby Digital Video Camcorder FireWire Cable (IEEE 1394) DV IN 4-Pin HP Digital Entertainment Center DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Video Camcorder FireWire Cable (IEEE 1394) 6-Pin HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting Video Equipment 111 Connecting V ideo Equipment Recognizing the digital video camcorder If the HP Digital Entertainment Center does not recognize your digital video camera: 1 Start up the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Click Start , and then click Control Panel . 3 Click Performance and Maintenance , if available, and then double-click the System icon. 4 Click the Hardware tab, and then click the Device Manager button. 5 Click the plus sign ( ) next to imaging devices. If the name of the camera appears under imaging devices the device is ready . If the name is not there, try the following: â Click Action , and then Scan for hardware changes . Look in Device Manager for a new addition under imaging devices. â Unplug the video cameraâ s transfer cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Power cycle the camera and plug it back in. Look in Device Manager for a new addition under imaging devices. For more information about viewing your pictures or digital video files in Media Center or copying your pictures to CD, see the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide.
112 HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting an Analog Camcorder Connecting an analog camera for video input (capture) Connectors: When connecting an analog video camera for input to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , use the Video and Audio In connectors on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Procedure: The following instructions ca n also be used to connect digital cameras with analog outputs. See the documentation that came with your video camera. T o connect an analog video camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and wait for the desktop to appear . See âInitial Configurationâ on page 127. 2 Connect the video camera transfer cable from the camera to the S-video conn ector or to the composite and audio connectors on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 3 T urn on the camera and use InterVideo W inDVD Creator to capture your video recording. . Connect an analog video camera for source input On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Analog Camcorder Choose one S-video Video VIDEO OUT
Connecting the Network Connecting the Network 113 Connecting the Network Y our system must have working broadband Internet to operate properly . The HP Digital Entertainment Center suppor ts many different network options, connections, and configurations. Y ou can connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to a: â Wireless 802.11 b/g network â Wired Ethernet port 10/100/1000 Y ou can connect your peripheral devices to work with the HP Digital Entertainment Center through USB or FireWire (IEEE 1394) connectors. This chapter describes the most typical, and some advanced, options to connect your HP Digital Entertainment Center to the Inter net, to a network, and to peripheral devices. Y our system may have different components. Internet Broadband Modem HP Digital Enter tainment Center On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center Chapter Contents: âPeripheral Connection Over viewâ on page 114 âT ypical Network Connectionsâ on page 116 âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117 âConnecting a DSL/Cable Modemâ on page 119 âConnecting Through a Routerâ on page 120 âUSB Device Connectionâ on page 121 âConnecting an HP Personal Media Driveâ on page 123 n Peripheral devices are sold separately . n For additional information on connecting network equipment, refer to the Start Here booklet and the hardware and ISP (Internet Service Provider) documentation that came with your network.
114 HP Digital Entertainment Center Peripheral Connection Over view Fr ont Panel (Location, availability , and nu mber of connectors may var y .) Connector Name Description Behind Upper Right Door HP Personal Media Drive Bay Removable hard disk Behind Lower Right Door 9-in-1 Memor y card readers SmartMedia/xD, MMC/SD, CompactFlash I/II, Microdrive, MS/MS-Pro USB 2.0 (2) Card readers behind lower right door LED: Green (with media inserted) Off (no media inserted) See âMemor y Card Readerâ on page 5. Behind Left Door A V connectivity for capturing analog and digital video from camcorders. Front button and inputs â see below 1394 FireWire (IEEE 1394), 4-pin DV input/output for digital video or removable hard disk drive HP Digital Entertainment Center 1394 input/output USB and card readers HP Personal Media Drive Bay HP Digital Entertainment Center HI SPEED USB 2.0 SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO SmartMedia / xD CompactFlash I/II MMC / SD MS / MS PRO HI SPEED USB 2.0 KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC HEADPHONES
Connecting the Network 115 Connecting the Network Back Panel (Location, availability , and number of connectors may var y .) Connector Name Description Cable USB 2.0 High-speed USB, 4 ports 1394 FireWire (IEEE 1394), 6-pin DV input/output for hard disk drive Ethernet RJ-45 10/100/1000 Wir el es s LA N Removable Antenna Coaxial wireless LAN 802.11 b/g LEDs (2) Activity: Blinks when transmitting/ receiving data Link: Solid green when wireless LAN is enabled and connected. Blinks when wireless LAN is scanning. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANT ENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER HI SPEED USB 2.0 1394 10/100/1000 ETHERNET WIRELESS LAN REMOV ABLE ANTENNA 802.11 b/g ACTIVITY LINK
116 HP Digital Entertainment Center T ypical Network Connections This section describes how to connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to the Inter net, so you can download the T elevision Program Guide and sur f the W eb. These are only suggested configurations. Y our system may be different. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system: Connection Network configuration See: Internet Wir el es s or Et he rn et (10BaseT) Or Fast Ethernet (100BaseT) Or Gigabit Ethernet (1000BaseT) From an 802.11 b/g wireless network âConnecting the Wireless Network Antennaâ on page 117 From a DSL modem or cable modem to a router âConnecting Through a Routerâ on page 120 From a DSL modem or cable modem âConnecting a DSL/Cable Modemâ on page 119 Then see: âInitial Configurationâ on page 127
Connecting the Network 117 Connecting the Network Connecting the Wireless Network Antenna Y ou can connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to a 802.11 b/g wireless network. The transceiver is built in to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . An exter nal antenna is supplied with your system. Y ou must connect this antenna to connect to the wireless network. Y ou need an existing wireless LAN network with an Internet connection (please consult your ISP for further information). Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center connects with other wireless product(s) via 802.11 b/g technology . The 802.11 b/g wireless LAN function allows you to connect to your home network and other devices that are compatible with the 802.11 b/g wireless LAN. The wireless LAN connects to the Internet. Y ou can establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point, or you can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client if you al ready have a wireless network functioning. Refer to the Quick Install Guide and CD manual included in the acce ssor y box to set up the HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point. A wireless access point and a wireless router are required and sold separately . W ireless Internet use requires a separately purchased Internet ser vice contract. Wireless router Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 8 02.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM A NTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Wireless Router 802. 1 1 b/ g HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
118 HP Digital Entertainment Center T o connect a Wi-Fi antenna to the HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Screw the antenna into the W ireless LAN Removable Antenna connector on to the back panel, as shown in the following illustration: 2 Y ou may want to move the end of the antenna away from the HP Digital Entertainment Center to improve your signal reception. 3 Check to ensure that: a The wireless router is connected to a DSL/cable modem. b The DSL/cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. c The wireless router power LED and connect LEDs are on. d The DSL/cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. e Y our wireless network functions properly . 4 Select how you want to set up your network: a If you would like a wireless connection between the HP Digital Entertainment Center and your existing wireless network, establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client. The Media Center setup wizard has a step for this option. This is the default mode. b If your HP Digital Entertainment Center is connected to the Internet and you would like to wireless-connect other machines to this HP Digital Entertainment Center , establish a wireless network using your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a wireless access point. For more information, refer to the Quick Install Guide and CD manual included in the Wi-Fi accessory box. DIGIT AL VIDEO OUT DVI 10/ 100/ 1000 ETHERNET VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOV ABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT . IN FM ANTENNA IN TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠CO AXIAL DUAL TUNER HDTV / SDTV ANT . IN A TSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 119 Connecting the Network Connecting a DSL/Cable Modem T o connect the HP Digital En ter tainment Center to the Internet, through an existing DSL or cable modem broadband connection: 1 Connect an RJ-45 network cable (sold separately) from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Ethernet connector to a DSL or cable modem. 2 Check the following: a The DSL or cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. b The DSL or cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. Refer to your DSL/cable modem and ISP documentation to establish a connection. DSL/Cable modem direct Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 139 4 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER W all Internet DSL/Cable Modem RJ-45 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
120 HP Digital Entertainment Center Connecting Thr ough a Router If you already have a home network functioning, you can connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to a LAN network and then to a DSL modem or cable modem. Y ou can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center as a client if you already have a home network functioning. Refer to your router , DSL/cable modem, and ISP documentation to establish a connection. T o connect the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to the Internet, through a router and a broadband connection: 1 Connect an RJ-45 network cable (sold separately) from the HP Digital Entertainment Center back panel Ethernet connector to a 10BaseT , 100BaseT , or 1000BaseT port on the router . 2 Check that: a The router is connected to the DSL/cable modem. b The DSL/cable modem is connected to an outside Internet connection. c The router power LED and connect LEDs are on. d The DSL/cable modem power LED and connect LEDs are on. Router Internet connection DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 139 4 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM AN TENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Router RJ-45 W all Internet DSL/Cable Modem RJ-45 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 121 Connecting the Network USB Device Connection Digital Still Camera The following instructions ap ply only to digital still cameras. When connecting a digital still camera, use a USB connector on the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o connect a digital still camera: 1 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . W ait for the desktop to appear . Minimize or close Media Center . 2 T urn on the digital still camera. See the documentation that came with your camera. 3 Connect the camera transfer cable into the camera. 4 Connect the camera transfer cable into an open USB connector on the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Most digital still cameras use either the USB or FireWi re (IEEE 1394) connector . 5 A Found New Hardware message displays. W ait two or three minutes for the system to make the necessar y settings for the new device. When installation is complete, a message displays telling you the camera is ready to use. Digital still camera connection (front panel) Digital still camera connection (back panel) On /Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center USB 2.0 Digital Camera DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Digital Camera USB 2.0 HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
122 HP Digital Entertainment Center Other USB Devices Y ou can connect other peripheral devices to the front or back of the HP Digital Entertainment Center through USB or FireWire (IEEE 1394) ports. The following devices can be connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center USB 2.0 high speed por ts: â iPod â MP3 player â USB drive â External hard disk drive â Printer â Scanner â Digital video camera â Digital still camera â PDA (personal digital assistant) â Keyboard â Mouse Peripheral devices are sold separately . See the documentation that came with your device. Y ou can go to http://www .hp.com to purchase peripheral devices online. T o connect the HP Personal Media Drive to the HP Digital Entertainment Center th rough a USB, see the documentation that came wi th the HP Personal Media Drive. USB device connection (front panel) USB device connection (back panel) On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center USB drive USB 2.0 (x2) iPod DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60Hz TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER iPod Printer Digital camera Portable hard disk drive HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER
Connecting the Network 123 Connecting the Network Connecting an HP Personal Media Drive The HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel includes a drive bay that houses the HP Personal Media Drive. The drive bay has an internal USB por t and power connector . The HP Personal Media Drive can also function as an external USB hard disk drive. Y ou must connect an external USB por t and power cable. Y ou can easily inser t and remove the drive from the bay without turning off the HP Di gital Enter tainment Center . Y ou can use the HP Personal Media Drive without installing the included software. However , HP recommends that you install the software to have access to additional features and read the documentation. For more information about installing the software, refer to the documentation that came with the HP Personal Media Drive. For more information about using an HP Personal Media Drive to store and transfer information, refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . HP Personal Media Drive w Do not move the drive while it is operating, to avoid hardware damage and potential data loss. Y ou can safely remove your drive only after you have completely run the Safely Remove Hardware wizard (located in the system tray at the bottom of the screen). After you have safely disconnected and powered off the drive, handle the drive by the plastic endcaps to avoid touching the aluminum sides if they are hot. The drive may feel warm. This is normal to allow faster heat dissipation.
124 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installing an HP Personal Media Drive T o connect an HP Personal Me dia Drive to the HP Digital Entertainment Center: 1 Install the HP Personal Media Drive software that is included with the drive (select models only). â For instructions about installing and using the HP Personal Media Drive software, refer to the documentation that came with your HP Personal Media Drive. 2 Open the HP Personal Media Drive bay front panel door . 3 Line up the ridges on the bottom of the drive with the two slots on the bottom of the drive bay . 4 Slide the drive all the way into the drive bay until the drive is firmly connected to the internal power and USB cables. Do not force the drive into the bay; it should slide easily into the bay . 5 If the HP Digital Entertainment Center is turned on, the blue power LED on the fr ont of the drive lights up when the drive is inserted correctly . HP Personal Media Drive installation Running the HP Personal Media Drive utility T o transfer files from your primar y hard disk drive to your HP Personal Media Drive, you must first run the utility for each installed Media Drive to access the drive within Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then HP Media Drive . 3 Connect the HP Personal Media Drive. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. For instructions about using the HP Personal Media Drive software, refer to the documentation that came with your HP Personal Media Drive.
Connecting the Network 125 Connecting the Network Disconnecting an HP Personal Media Drive Y ou can safely remove the HP Personal Media Drive when both the amber activity and blue power LEDs are off. T o disconnect your HP Personal Drive safely: 1 Close Media Center and all other programs that may be accessing your HP Personal Media Drive. 2 Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray at the bottom of the desktop. If this icon is hidden, click the arrows on the taskbar to display it. The Safely Remove Hardware window opens. 3 Double-click USB Mass Storage Device to locate your HP Personal Media Drive. USB Mass Storage Device may be listed twice. One may contain a memor y card reader or other mass storage drive. 4 Select the HP Personal Media Drive , and then click OK . This name of the drive may appear as Generic V olume , followed by the assigned drive letter . A Safe to Remove Hardware message appears in the system tray at the bottom of your desktop letting you know that the device is safe to disconnect. 5 Click Close . 6 Open the HP Personal Media Drive bay front panel door . 7 Disconnect the drive from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Disconnecting the HP Personal Media Drive n When your HP Digital Entertainment Center is in standby mode (a reduced power state), the drive turns off. w T o avoid hardware damage and data loss, always disconnect the drive safely , when it is not active. When the amber LED is blinking, the drive is active, saving or transferring data.
126 HP Digital Entertainment Center
Initial Configuration Initial Configuration 127 Initial Configuration This chapter describes how to set up your HP Digital Entertainment Center software, including how to configure the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. When you complete the procedures in this chapter , you can use your HP Digital Entertainment Center in your home entertainment center . Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . n Y ou should only per form the procedures in this chapter after all cables have been connected. Chapter Contents: âStarting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First T imeâ on page 128 âWindows W elcomeâ on page 131 âMedia Center First Runâ on page 132 âConfiguring Audioâ on page 136 âConfiguring Videoâ on page 141 âConfiguring the Systemâ on page 154 w Make sure you have followed all safety instructions for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , especially the impor tant AC power information. See âSafety Informationâ on page 17.
128 HP Digital Entertainment Center Star ting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center for the First Time T urn power on to all connected devices such as TV and audio equipment before turning on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Power on only after you have completed the full setup. Installing the Keyboard Batteries (Initial) The keyboard comes with batteries preinstalled. The batteries are fresh from the factor y . 1 T urn the keyboard over . 2 Pull the tab. T o set up your system: ââInstalling the Keyboard Batteries (Initial)â on page 128 âInitial Startupâ on page 129 âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130 âRequired Setupâ on page 132 âOptional Setupâ on page 133 âIf Y our Connections Donât W orkâ on page 135 âAdjusting the Front Panel Display Brightnessâ on page 135 n Use only AA alkaline batteries in the keyboard.
Initial Configuration 129 Initial Configuration Initial Star tup After you have connected the equipment, you are ready to turn on the system. 1 Make sure the video and audio cables are connected before you turn on the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn on all connected system equipment, such as TVs, set-top boxes, and A V receivers. 3 Plug the HP Digital Entertainment Center AC power cable into a wall outlet. â Use a surge protector to prevent power surges or voltage spikes. 4 Press the On/Standby (power) button on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . The system starts. 5 See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. The display on the TV screen may not be optimized until after you set the display settings. n Set the volume to mid-level on the A V receiver and on the TV . DIGITAL VIDEO OUT DVI DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL 10/ 100/ 1000 HI SPEED USB 2.0 ETHERNET 1394 AUDIO IN R L AUDIO 7.1 PRE-OUT SURROUND BACK SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT R R R L L L VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y Pb VGA Pr INFRARED TRANSMITTER OUT 1 2 TV SOURCE 1 IN VIDEO AUDIO S-VIDEO R L WIRELESS LAN 802.11 b/g REMOVABLE ANTENNA ACTIVITY LINK CABLE/ANT. IN FM ANTENNA IN AC IN 100-240V- 4/A 50/60H z TV SOURCE 2 IN S-VIDEO AUDIO RL 75 ⦠COAXIAL DUAL TUNER Surge Protector Line Conditioner AC IN 1 10-240V 5 0-60Hz AC W all Outlet HDTV / SDTV ANT. IN ATSC TUNER w Make sure you have followed all safety instructions for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , especially the impor tant AC power information. See âSafety Informationâ on page 17. Power On On/Standby
130 HP Digital Entertainment Center Syncing the Keyboard T est the keyboard after the operating system is loaded. Move the trackball to see if the cursor moves. If the keyboard does not operate, you must synchronize the keyboard with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o sync the keyboard: 1 After you have made all connections and have perfor med the initial startup procedure, make sure the HP Digital Entertainment Center is tur ned on. 2 Briefly press the Keyboard Connect button on the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel, behind the left door . The button will flash, indicating the system is ready to connect (sync) with the keyboard. 3 Press the red connect button once on the bottom of the keyboard. The front panel Keyboard Connect button flashes and stops, indicating a successful sync. Important: If you press the bu tton twice, you will need to repeat steps 1 through 4. 4 T est the keyboard. Move the trackball, and see if the cursor moves. 5 If the keyboard does not operate: a Check the batteries. b Repeat steps 1 through 4. KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1394 MIC IN HEADPHONES On/ Standby HP Digital Entertainment Center KEYBOARD CONNECT FRONT INPUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO DV IN L R 1 394 MIC IN HEADPHONES KEYBOARD CONNECT
Initial Configuration 131 Initial Configuration Windows W elcome The system starts and displays the initial Microsoft ® Win do ws ® setup screen for the first power on only . Y ou will need a mouse and keyboard to navigate the screens. T o set up Windows for the first time: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the initial Microsoft Windows setup. 2 Click Next to set up your system. 3 Select your countr y/region and language in System Settings. Change is optional. Click Next . 4 Select your T ime Zone. Change is optional. Click Next . 5 Read the terms and condit ions of the End Users License Agreement and if you agree, accept the terms and conditions. Click Next . 6 Select Automatic Updates . Click Next . 7 Name your system. Click Next . 8 Select Finish . 9 A countdown displays. a After the countdown the screen goes blank. b Do not turn off your system du r in g t hi s o ne time setup process. This takes approximately 8 to 10 minutes. 10 Windows restarts automatically . 11 After the system restar ts, you will begin the Media Center first run. See âMedia Center First Runâ on page 132. Initial Setup W ait Time After you power up your system for the first time and complete the initial setup, you will see a welcome screen. This welcome screen will be displayed for one to three minutes, without any visible sign of system activity . During this period, your system is completing your account setup and should not be interrupted. Please do not power off while the welcome screen is displayed. After it completes, the desktop will be displayed and the Media Center Setup Wizard will automatically launch.
132 HP Digital Entertainment Center Media Center First Run The initial Media Center setup wizard consists of required setup and the optional setup. Required Setup The system displays the initial Media Center setup wizard for the first power on or unti l the Media Center setup is completed. The wizard includes steps for your network or broadband connections. Connect the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your wired network or broadband connections before you press the On/Standby button. T o set up Media Center for the first time: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the initial Media Center startup wizard. These instructions include choosing: â How Media Center connects to the Internet. â How to join a wireless network, if you have one. â How to join an existing (wired) network, if you have one. 2 The wizard sets up the required components. T o continue, set up optional components as required. See âOptional Setupâ on page 133. n When Media Center is open, you can press F1 on the keyboard to open Media Center Help.
Initial Configuration 133 Initial Configuration Optional Setup This procedure for optional components within the Media Center wizard can be completed at any time; you can define or change these settings using the Media Center settings. In this portion of the Media Center wizard, you will: â Configure tuners, TV signal, and T elevision Program Guide information. â Select and adjust Media Center display settings. â Set up speakers. â T each the HP Digital Enter tainment Center to control your cable TV or satellite receiver set-top box. T o set up optional components in Media Center: 1 Follow the onscreen instructions for the Media Center Optional Components startup wizard. 2 Confirm your countr y/region. 3 Set up the TV signal, manually or automatically . Make sure a TV source is connected. The wizard scans for signals if you select automatic. It also sets up a set-top box. 4 Set up and download the T elevision Program Guide. Y ou need your ZIP or postal code. 5 Choose and, if needed, adjust the display settings. 6 Choose the number of speakers you have. Y ou can also test the speakers. 7 If you selected 5.1 or 7.1 speakers, or if you are using S/PDIF (digital), you must set the DVD player speaker settings. See âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. n When Media Center is open, you can press F1 on the keyboard to open Media Center Help.
134 HP Digital Entertainment Center Using Media Center Setup Wizard for Optional Setup of your TV Display If your TV connects to the system using a composite or S-video connection, the Media Center Setup Wizard cannot make automatic adjustment of settings for your TV display . Instead of using the wizard for automatic adjustment, set the TV display by using the Windows Desktop Properties. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. This automatic adjustment is available during the Optional Setup, within the option Optimize how Media Center looks on your display . During the Media Center Setup Wizard, at the Optional Setup, do the following: 1 Select Optimize how Media Center looks on your display . 2 Select the display type for Identify Y our Display T ype . 3 Select the Connection T ype for your TV display . 4 Do the following for your type of video connection: Vid eo Ou t Option Action Composite or S-video â Click Next . â On the next screen, select Keep my current settings and continue . â Click Next . â See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. Do not select the option Preview Automatic Adjustment. DVI or VGA or Component (YPbPr) Continue using the wizard because the wizard can adjust your TV display . w If you choose the option Preview Automatic Adjustment, the screen may appear black or seem to halt for approximately 20 seconds. W ait until the wizard screen reappears, choose âDo not adjust any settingsâ, click Next, and then continue with the next step in this procedure .
Initial Configuration 135 Initial Configuration If Y our Connections Donâ t W ork Y ou can use Media Center wi zards to walk you through the connection process: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings . 3 Click one of the following topics: â General â TV â Pictures â Music â DVD â Messenger and Caller ID â Radio â Help 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. 5 If you cannot connect to the Internet, the wizard displays automatically . Adjusting the Fr ont Panel Display Brightness Y ou can adjust the brightness of the HP Digital Entertainment Center front panel media info display . This setting does not control the brightness of the On/Standby (power) button or Media Center mode status LEDs. T o adjust the front panel display brightness: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Front Panel . 3 Change the front panel brightness. 4 Set adjustment for manual or automatic. Automatic changes the display brightness based on room light level. 5 Click Save .
136 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring Audio Y ou may have to optimize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center audio configuration to get the best sound on your audio system. Connecting Headphones Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center comes with a headphones connector (1/4 inch [6.5 mm]) on the front panel. Y ou can connect a mini plug adapter (sold separately) into the 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) plug to use 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) mini-jack headphones. The Audio Out speakers are muted when you plug in the headphones, but S/PDIF does not mute. Connecting a Micr ophone Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center has a microphone connector on the front panel. Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: âConnecting Headphonesâ on page 136 âConnecting a Microphoneâ on page 136 âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138 âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139
Initial Configuration 137 Initial Configuration Selecting recording devices T o select a sound recording device: 1 Click Start on the taskbar . 2 Choose Contr ol Panel . 3 Click Sounds and Audio Devices (or Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices ). The Sounds and Audio Devices window opens. 4 Click the Audio tab. The window opens. This window is easier to read on a monitor . Y ou can lower the display resolution to read the window . Y ou will need the keyboard and mouse. 5 In the Sound Recording area, click the Vo l u m e button, and then choose the source for sound recording. 6 Click OK . 7 Close the window . n Audio distortion may occur if recording volume is set too high.
138 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the V olume T o adjust speaker volume, use the: â Remote control â TV â AV r e c e i v e r â Buttons on the keyboard â V olume knob on the speakers â V olume knob on the subwoofer â V olume knob on the monitor (if connected) â V olume controls within a program, such as the volume buttons on the Media Center navigation bar or on the remote control â V olume icon on the taskbar Double-click and adjust the volume. Some applications may play back at low volume, even when the volume knob is turned to the maximum position. If this is the case, double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the taskbar and increase the volume. Locating the volume icon If you do not see the V olume icon on the taskbar: 1 Click Start , and then Control Panel . Click Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices , if it is available. 2 Double-click Sounds and Audio Devices . The Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window opens. This window is easier to read on a monitor . Y ou can lower the display resolution to read the window . Y ou will need the keyboard and mouse. 3 Click the Vo l u m e tab. Place a check in the Place volume icon in the taskbar check box. 4 Click Apply , and then click OK . The V olume icon appears in the taskbar . w Ensure that the mute box is not checked. n V olume cannot be contr olled from the HP Digital Entertainment Center remote control if the S/PDIF digital audio out connects to your A V receiver . Control the sound from your A V receiver .
Initial Configuration 139 Initial Configuration Configuring Audio Output Y ou must adjust the audio settings in two places after you have installed and connected the HP Digital Entertainment Center to your audio system. Configure both the Media Center speaker settings and audio for the DVD player . The following table shows which procedures to perform for your audio system. If yo u set up speakers using the Media Center Optional Components wizard, then set up the audio for the DVD player only . Media Center speaker settings (TV Audio) DVD audio setting Procedure 2 (default) 2 speakers; Dolby Surround Compatible (default) Default, no audio output configuration required. 5.1 5.1 Change settings. See âConfigu ring audio for Media Centerâ on page 140 and âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. 7.1 7.1 Change settings. See âConfigu ring audio for Media Centerâ on page 140 and âConfiguring audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. Digital Audio S/PDIF on (default) Digital Audio S/PDIF off (default) Change settings. See âConfiguri ng audio for the DVD playerâ on page 140. If you use digital audio, the Media Ce nter S/PDIF default setting is on, but the DVD Player S/PDIF default se tting is OFF . Y ou must change the DVD S/PDIF default setting to ON to hear all channels in DVD digital audio.
140 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring audio for Media Center T o configure multichannel audio output for Media Center audio: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings , General , Media Center Setup , and then Setup your Speakers. The Speaker Setup screen displays. 3 Click Next . 4 Under Specify how many speakers you have , select the speaker number that matches your system. For example, select 5.1 . Click Next . 5 Select Te s t . If you hear tones from all your speakers, click Next . If you do not hear tones from all your speakers, follow the onscreen instructions. 6 Click Finish . Configuring audio for the DVD player T o configure multichannel audio output for the Media Center DVD playback: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click Settings , DVD, Audio , and then Configuration . 3 Set sound output to match your speaker system. For example, select 5.1 for analog audio connections. If you have a digital audio connection, select S/PDIF . 4 Click Save . n Reduce the volume level before changing channels. Exercise particular caution when changing from A TSC to NTSC channels. Y our analog NTSC channel audio levels may be noticeably higher than your SD/HDTV channel audio levels. The channel sound volume is controlled by the content pr ovider . n If your speaker configuration is not displayed, click the Sound Effect (speaker) icon in the desktop system tray .
Initial Configuration 141 Initial Configuration Configuring V ideo Y ou may have to optimize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center video configuration to get the best image on your TV/display screen. Configuring V ideo Output Y ou can configure your HP Digital Enter tainment Center video for dual-display . For instance, you can view the screen on your TV and your monitor if both are connected. Y ou can also set up additional displays. See âVideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 67 to connect your TV and monitor . If you have a multichannel sound system, and the broadcast is only 2-channel, you may not hear all the sound; you may need to chan ge your audio settings to 2.0/2.1. Then change the settings back for multichannel broadcasts. Video software can change periodically; check HP Support for updates. Go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number . Select the configuration that most closely matches your home system. See: âConfiguring Video Outputâ on page 141 âDual screenâ on page 142 âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144 âFinding A TSC HDTV and Standard TV Channelsâ on page 151 âT uning the Desktop Displayâ on page 151 n Y our TV and monitor must be connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center before turning on the power to see the display on two screens.
142 HP Digital Entertainment Center Dual screen The HP Digital Entertainmen t Center can connect more than one display device (CRT monitor , flat panel monitor , TV , and so on) to the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . The display defaults to the mo nitor after turn on if you have two displays connected. Y ou must set up the TV manually . This is also called âcloningâ. The screen resolution may change if you switch to two displays. See âViewing the screen image on a second displayâ on page 142. Changing screens Once you have configured for dual screen, you can quickly change where the HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop appears by pressing Alt F5. (Press the Alt key and the F5 key on the keyboard at the same time.) Each time you press the Alt F5 key combination, the HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop appears on the next device. If Alt F5 does not work, restart the HP Digital Entertainment Center and tr y again. V iewing the screen image on a second display T o view your HP Digital Enter tainment Center screen image on a second TV or monitor: 1 Make sure the video and audio cables are connected before you turn on the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 2 T urn on the TV . Press the Video/TV button on the TV remote control to select the Video input. 3 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 4 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. . Properties window
Initial Configuration 143 Initial Configuration 5 Ensure nView Display Settings is selected in the left side list. 6 Select Clone from the nV iew Display Mode drop down menu. 7 Select the Primar y and secondary displays from the drop down menu. 8 Click Apply . 9 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 10 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . Disabling the dual screen option When you want to disconnect the TV from the HP Digital Entertainment Center , you may need to disable the dual screen option to return yo ur HP Digital Enter tainment Center display to its original resolution. T o disable the TV or monitor dual screen option and view your HP Digital Entertainment Center image on the original display: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. 2 Ensure nView Display Settings is selected in the left side list. 3 Select Single Display from the nV iew Display Mode drop down menu. 4 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 5 Click the OK button to save changes, and then click OK again to close the Display Properties window . Disconnecting the TV T o disconnect the TV : 1 Disable the TV option. See âDisabling the dual screen optionâ on page 141. 2 T urn off the TV and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 3 Remove the video cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center Video Out and TV In.
144 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the Desktop Display Some tasks on the HP Digital Entertainment Center require that you leave Media Center and use the Windows XP desktop. Because Windows XP is not specifically designed for TV , some messages and dialogs on the desktop may be difficult to read on some TVs. Lowering the display resolution can make messages and dialogs easier to read by enlarging the text. This procedure is an example only and may var y depending on your TV/display type, supported for mats, and video out connections. Y ou may have to per form the procedure more than once to optimize the image. Y ou can adjust the display using: â The Media Center wizard. See âAdjusting the Display in Media Centerâ on page 145. Or â From the desktop. See âAdj usting the Display from the Desktopâ on page 149. w This setup procedure is advanced. Knowledge of video concepts and computer terms is helpful. Follow the steps carefully . Y our TV/ display may require settings and configurations different than those listed in the following procedures. n Y ou may have to per form this procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures.
Initial Configuration 145 Initial Configuration Adjusting the Display in Media Center Before you begin, verify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center and turned on, and ensure that your TV screen is set to normal mode (not letter-box, wide, or re-sized). T o adjust the video settings in Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Video Settings . 3 Click Display/Connection Wizard . 4 V erify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainm ent Center and tur ned on. Check the boxes. Click Next . n Use the arrow keys to select Next if the lower buttons are not visible.
146 HP Digital Entertainment Center 5 V erify the TV/display type. Click Next . 6 V e rify the video out connection type. As required, select the correct connection to match the back panel, by clicking on a video out connector such as video (composite), S-video, component video, VGA or DVI. Click Next . Flat panel display shown. Component video output shown.
Initial Configuration 147 Initial Configuration 7 Select the screen resolution definition type that is supported by your TV/display . Click Next . This screen may var y or not appear , depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 8 V erify that the settings are correct. Click Preview . The changed video settings display . Y our settings may vary . Y our settings may vary .
148 HP Digital Entertainment Center 9 Click Ye s to apply the settings. The screen may flicker for a few seconds while the settings change. If the new setting is not co rrect, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 10 Click Finish . DVD Playback Y ou may have to per form the Adjusting the Desktop Display procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures. T o play a commercial DVD video in component video, the resolution format must be set to 480i or 480p. The DVD will not play after it is inserted into the drive, and you may see an error message when you tr y to play the DVD in component video and the resolution format is set above 480i or 480p. T o play a commercial DVD video, in component video, in Media Center: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Settings , and then Video Settings . 3 Click DVD Mode (480p) . (Select this mode only if your TV supports 480p mode.) 4 After playing the commercial DVD video in component video, perfor m the Adjusting the Desktop Display procedure to return the desktop image and Media Center to a higher resolution format. See âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ on page 144. n Y ou may also need to per form the HDTV Overscan procedure, depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. n Y ou may have to per form the âAdjusting the Desktop Displayâ procedure before and after playing a commercial DVD video in component video, due to copy protection measures.
Initial Configuration 149 Initial Configuration Adjusting the Display fr om the Desktop Y ou can also use the following procedures to adjust the TV video settings. These procedures are examples only and may var y depending on your TV/display type, supported for mats, and video out connections. Y ou may have to perfor m the procedure more than once to optimize the image. Y ou can use this window to adjust the TV video image in composite, S-video, or component video out. This window is not available for single di splays in DVI or VGA video out. Use the Media Center HP Settings wizard to adjust these displays. Before you begin, verify that the video equipment is properly connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center and turned on, and ensure that your TV screen is set to normal mode (not letter-box, wide or re-sized). T o adjust the video settings from the Windows desktop: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display and the TV/display in the dialog box. The GeForce window opens. 2 Select TV Settings from the left side list. 3 Select the Signal format to a type that is supported by your TV/display . (For commercial DVD playback in component video, select: 480i or 480p.) 4 Click Apply (or click OK to save changes). 5 Perform HDTV Overscan Configuration, as required. See âHDTV Overscan Config urationâ on page 150. The HDTV Overscan Configuration window may open, depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 6 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. The screen may flicker for a few seconds while the settings change. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. If the new setting is not correct, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 7 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . n If the lower buttons are not visible, right-click the top bar and select move to move the window and access the buttons.
150 HP Digital Entertainment Center HDTV Overscan Configuration T o use underscan to show the entire Windows desktop: 1 Right click on the desktop, select nVidia Display , and click HDTV Overscan Configuration in the dialog box. The HDTV Overscan Configuration window opens. This screen may var y or not appear , depending on the type of TV/display and video connection. 2 Select Use underscan to show the entire Windows desktop . 3 Click Apply (or click OK to save the changes). 4 When the HP Digital Entertainment Center image appears on the TV screen, click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. If the new setting is not correct, wait for 15 seconds and the previous screen will display . 5 Click the OK button to save changes. Click OK again to close the window . Y ou cannot use HDTV Overscan Configuration for 480i or 480p.
Initial Configuration 151 Initial Configuration Finding A TSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels (Select models only) After you complete the Media Center and Digital TV setup wizards and then download your TV Program Guide, the Media Center TV Program Guide may display incorrect A TSC DTV channels. Some channels may have an incorrect channel number and other channels may not be displayed at all. These HDTV channels may be available in your area, but they may not be listed in the Media Center TV Program Guide. A more complete A TSC TV channel guide may be available from third party providers, such as Titan TV . For more information, see the Media Center Online Spotlight. T o view or record HDTV content, you need an HP Digital Entertainment Center with A TSC tuner (included) and UHF/VHF antenna (sold separately). T uning the Desktop Display The HP Digital Entertainment Center desktop default screen resolution is 800 by 600 pixels. In the default format, the Windows desktop on your TV/display screen may show a black border around it. Y ou may also see that the video image is larger than your TV/display (overscan). n Broadcasters sometimes use two channels: one for Standard TV (NTSC) and one for HDTV (A TSC DTV). An HDTV channel can broadcast several programs at the same time. w Only advanced users should attempt to perform this procedure. If you cannot see a screen image, go to http://www .hp.com/ support and select your model number for detailed information on advanced video setup.
152 HP Digital Entertainment Center Adjusting the V ideo Image T o optimize the HP Digital Enter tainment Center video image so it best fits your TV screen, do the following: 1 Right-click on the desktop, and click nVidia Display in the dialog box. The Properties window opens. Properties window 2 Select Screen resolutions and refresh rates from the left side list. Adjust the Screen resolution and Monitor settings as required. 3 Click Apply .
Initial Configuration 153 Initial Configuration 4 Click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 5 Select Color Correction from the left side list. Adjust the brightness and contrast slider bars as required. 6 Click Apply . 7 Click Ye s to keep the setting. Y ou have 15 seconds to accept this new setting before it reverts to the previous setting. 8 Close the Properties window .
154 HP Digital Entertainment Center Configuring the System Y ou can customize your HP Digital Enter tainment Center system settings. Configuring the Keyboard Buttons Y ou can configure some of your HP Digital Enter tainment Center shortcut keyboard buttons. 1 Click Start on the taskbar , choose Contr ol Panel , and then click Printers and Other Hardware , if it is available. 2 Double-click Keyboard . 3 In the Keyboard Properties window that opens, click the Buttons tab. 4 Double-click the button you want to change. 5 Choose the button capability from the drop-down list. Enter the Display label and Address information. â For a W eb site, enter the complete W eb site URL in the Address box. Example: http://www .hp.com/suppor t 6 Click OK . 7 On the Buttons tab, click Apply . Repeat steps 4 through 6 for other buttons. 8 Click OK when you are finished. See: âConfiguring the Keyboard Buttonsâ on page 154 âRegistering with HPâ on page 155 âSetting Up Virus Protectionâ on page 155 âT ransferring Infor mation from Y our Old PC to Y our HP Digital Entertainment Centerâ on page 155 âInstalling Softwareâ on page 156 âUtility Programsâ on page 156
Initial Configuration 155 Initial Configuration Registering with HP T o register with HP to receive changes, updates, and support: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , HP Suppor t , and then Register Now . 3 Follow onscreen instructions, using the keyboard and trackball. Y ou can also register with HP in the following ways: â Double-click the registration icon on your desktop, and follow onscreen instructions. â Register online at: http://register .hp.com Setting Up V irus Pr otection Y ou should use virus protection if you connect to the Internet. Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide to set up the virus protection software. T ransferring Information from Y our Old PC to Y our HP Digital Enter tainment Center See the built-in Microsoft Windows Help and Support Center; search for transfer wizard and select the over view article, Files and Settings T ransfer Wizard Overview . This information describes a Microsoft solution for moving your files to your new HP Digital Entertainment Center .
156 HP Digital Entertainment Center Installing Software After you turn on the HP Digi tal Enter tainment Center the first time and then restart it, you can install any additional software programs that came on CDs or DVDs included in the HP Digital Entertainment Center box (select models only). Y ou may wish to install additional software programs or hardware devices on your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Restart the HP Digital Enter tainment Center after installation. Choose software that is compatible with your HP Digital Entertainment Center; check the operating system, memor y , and other requirements listed for the new software for compatibility with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Install the new software according to the directions provided by the software manufacturer . Check the manufacturerâ s documentation or customer ser vice information for help if you need it. Utility Pr ograms HP Settings HP provides special utility programs in the HP Digital Entertainment Center Media Center that configure the desktop display , adjust front panel brightness, and setup the HP Personal Media Drive. T o use Media Center utility programs: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms and then HP Settings . 3 Select a program or folder: â DVD â Front Panel â HP Media Drive â Video Settings
Initial Configuration 157 Initial Configuration System utilities HP provides special utility programs in the PC Help & T ools folder that display support infor mation and initiate Application or System Recover y . T o use utility programs: 1 Click Start , choose All Programs , and then PC Help & T ools . 2 Select a program or folder: â HP Application Recover y â HP Support Infor mation â HP PC System Recover y â PC Doctor â Safety and Comfort Guide â System Restore
158 HP Digital Entertainment Center
T roubleshooting T roubleshooting 159 T r oubleshooting This section contains possible solutions for some problems you may be experiencing with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Chapter Contents: T o solve audio problems, see âAudioâ on page 160. T o solve video problems, see âVideoâ on page 162. T o solve system problems, see âSystemâ on page 164. For other sources of information, see âGetting Helpâ on page 170.
160 HP Digital Entertainment Center Pr oblems and Solutions Audio Find the description that most closely matches your audio problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution I donâ t have sound from my speakers. â Use active, powered speakers or speakers with an amplifier . â V erify sound cable connections. â Check V olume and Mute settings. See âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138. â Reconfigure the software for surround soun d. See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. â Reinstall the sound card drivers by using Application Recover y . See the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Enter tainment Center . I have low volume sound from my speakers. â Check volume and mute settings. See âAdjusting the V olumeâ on page 138. â Some programs may result in low volume, even when the volume setting within the program is turned to the maximum position . If this is the case, double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the taskbar and increase volume. My TV audio volume increases or decreases when I change channels. Reduce the volume level before changing ch annels. Exercise par ticular caution when changing from A TSC to NTSC channels. Y o ur analog NTSC channel audio levels may be noticeably higher than your SD/HDT V channel audio levels. The channel sound volume is controlled by the content provider .
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 161 T roubleshooting The HP Digital Entertainment Center doesnâ t make any sound. â Check that the A V receiver or powered sp eakers are tur ned on and are set to the proper input. â Increase the volume on the A V receiver or the HP Digital Enter tainment Center remote control. â Press the Mute button on the HP Digital Entertainment Center keyboard or on the remote control to see if the Mute feature is turned on. â Use the keyboard controls to increase the volume. â Click the Vo l u m e icon on the Windows taskbar . Increase the volume, and make sure the Mute box is not checked. â Double-click the Vo l u m e icon on the Windows taskbar . The Play Control window opens. Make sure none of the Mute chec k boxes are selected. Adjust the volume slide bars to increase volume. â If your speakers have a Power button, check whether it is turned on and whether the power supply is connected to the power source. â Check the speaker connections. â Remove any connected headphones. Surround sound isnâ t working. See âConfiguring Audio Outputâ on page 139. Problem Solution
162 HP Digital Entertainment Center Vi d e o Find the description that most closely matches your problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution I am using a TV with the HP Digital Entertainment Center , but I cannot see anything. â Check that the correct input source is selected on the TV . â Check that the TV is connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âVideo Out to TVâ on page 64. â Check that the TV Out image is enabled. See âConfiguring Vi deoâ on page 141. I cannot see anything on the TV . I can hear it, though. â If the Video Output S-video and composite connections are not connected to a TV or Video Input when the HP Digital Entert ainment Center is turned on, the S-video and composite jacks will turn off automatica lly . Y ou must turn off, by pressing and holding down the On/Standby (power) butto n for 4 seconds, and restart your HP Digital Entertainment Center to ensure Vi deo Out connection to your TV or A V receiver . â Check your input switches. My HDTV displays a distorted screen instead of a blank screen (blue or dark). The screen may be cropped or display dark borders. â Refer to http://www .hp.com/suppor t for additional information on adjusting the display or updating the drivers. â If you see a blank screen, you cannot perf or m recover y or certain activities with DVI. Change your Video Out connection to VGA or S-video, recover your system, and then reconnect the DVI connection. â Connect a monitor to your HP Digital Ente r tainment Center . See âV ideo Out to TV and Monitorâ on page 69. My screen flickers during startup. If your TV is connected with S-video or composite video out connection, the screen may flicker/flash during power-on to windows desktop process. W ait; the screen should display normally after the desktop displays. The HP Digital Entertainment Center doesnâ t recognize my digital video camera. See âRecognizing the digital video camcorderâ on page 111.
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 163 T roubleshooting My remote control doesnâ t work. â Check that the remote control indicator li ght on the remote lights up when you press a button. If it does not, replace the batteries. â Make sure that the batteries for the re mote control are charged and installed correctly . â Make sure the front of the remote sensor on the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not blocked (behind display window). â Point the remote control at the HP Digita l Entert ainment Center (not at the TV) within a 45-degree angle range, and less than 26 feet (8 meters) away . â If a pressed key repeats itself (or sticks), tr y altering the lighting conditions in the room or moving the location of the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Press the Enter button on the remote control after changing a channel. â Point the remote control toward the remote sensor , and press a button. A faint red light should appear on the remote sensor . If the light appears, then the problem is probably in the Media Center soft ware. Close Media Center , restart the HP Digital Entertainment Center , and then open Media Center again. â If the remote control works in Media Cent er but not when changing channels, you need to reconfigure the Media Center soft ware settings for the cable set-top box or satellite receiver . Refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . My remote sensor is not receiving a signal from the remote control. If a faint red light does not appear when you point the remote control at the front panel remote sensor and press a button, tr y the following: â Check that the remote control indicator li ght on the remote lights up when you press a button. If it does not, replace the batteries. Or 1 Click Start on the desktop, right-click My Computer , and then select Properties . 2 Click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager . 3 Click the plus ( ) sign next to Universal Serial Bus Controllers. 4 If the eHome Infrared Receiver is listed under Universal Serial Bus Controllers, Windows is properly detecting the IR receiver . If it is not listed, go to the next step. 5 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Ce nter . Remove all external USB devices. Remove the power cord for 30 seconds. Then reconnect external devices and power . Repeat steps 1â4. Problem Solution
164 HP Digital Entertainment Center System Find the description that most closely matches your problem, and tr y the corresponding solution. Problem Solution My HP Digital Entertainment Center wonâ t turn on at all. â When you press the On button on the front of the HP Digital Entertainment Center , the following events should happen: a The HP On/Standby (power) button should light and the front display should light up. b The hard disk drive and fans spin. c The HP Digital Entertainment Center makes one beep, indicating it is operating properly . â If the HP Digital Entertainment Cent er doesnât go through the previous procedure, check the following: a The power cord and all cables are securely plugged into the HP Digital Entertainment Center . b The power cord is plugged into a gr ounded outlet. Check to see whether the outlet works by plugging another item into it. c Look inside the rear fan. If you see a green LED, then AC power is available. d The TV or monitor is connected to the HP Digital Entertainment Center , plugged in, and turned on. e Make sure that the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not too hot, and that vents are not blocked. I installed a new printer or other device, and it wonâ t work. â Be sure that you installed the device drivers that came with the new device. â Y ou may need an updated driver for Windows XP . For non-HP peripherals, contact the vendor directly . For HP peripherals, visit the HP W e b site. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide for details.
T roubleshooting 165 T roubleshooting The HP Digital Entertainment Center (or part of it) doesnât seem to be working. â The HP Digital Entertainment Center is in standby mode (the On button power indicator light is solid amber). Press the Standby button on the keyboard or the Standby button on the remote control to turn on the unit. â Make sure the keyboard syncs with the HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. â T r y restar ting the HP Digital En ter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . â If the HP Digital Entertainment Center shows no response to mouse or keyboard actions, reset the HP Digital Entertainment Center: a Press and hold the On button for more than 4 seconds until the HP Digital Entertainment Center tur ns off. b W ait a few seconds, and turn the HP Digital Entertainment Center back on. â A software program, software driver , or the operating system software may be corrupted, erased, or damaged. Y ou can use Application Recover y or System Recover y to reinstall the software. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Itâ s possible that a voltage spike, po wer outage, or brownout has occurred. Symptoms of voltage spikes include a flickering video display , unexpected HP Digital Entertainment Center star tups, and the HP Digital Entertainment Center not responding to your command s. A voltage spike can occasionally corrupt or destroy files, so it is a go od idea to consistently make backup copies of your data files. Prevent voltage spikes by installing a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the HP Digital Entertainment Center power cord. Problem Solution n Using the On button to reset the HP Digital Entertainment Center is not recommended and should be used only as a last resort.
166 HP Digital Entertainment Center When I push one of the special or multimedia buttons on the keyboard, nothing happens. â Check that the standard keyboard keys and mouse work properly . Or â Check the button configuration. T o configure the button: 1 Click Start on the taskbar , and then click Control Panel . 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware , if it is available. 3 Double-click Keyboard . 4 In the Keyboard Properties window that opens, click the Buttons tab. 5 Double-click the button you want to ch ange. The button configuration window opens. 6 Choose the button capability from the drop-down list. Enter the Display label and the Address information. (For a W eb site, enter the complete W eb site URL in the Address box.) 7 Click OK and then on the Buttons tab, click Apply . 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each button you want to configure. 9 Click OK when you are finished configuring the keyboard. My keyboard or the trackball doesnâ t work even though the HP Digital Entertainment Center and TV or monitor seem to work. â Make sure the keyboard syncs with th e HP Digital Entertainment Center . See âSyncing the Keyboardâ on page 130. â T r y restar ting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . Problem Solution
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 167 T roubleshooting The TV or monitor doesnâ t work, even though the HP Digital Entertainment Center appears to. â Make sure the TV or monitor is turned on â it has its own Power button. â Make sure the proper TV or monitor input is selected. â Check the cable connection between the monitor and the HP Digital Entertainment Center . The cable connecto rs must be pushed in all the way prior to powering on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Ensure that the cables to your monitor and your TV connect to the Video Out connectors on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . â Make sure the monitor power cord is plugged into a grounded outlet. Check to see whether the outlet works by pluggi ng another item into it. (If the light on the front of the monitor is li t, the monitor is getting power .) â T r y restar ting the HP Digital En ter tainment Center as follows: a Click Start on the taskbar . b Click T urn Off Computer . c Click Restart . â Adjust the brightness and contra st controls on the monitor . My software stopped working. Refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center to reinstall a softwa re program. If your program came on a CD, follow the instructions that came with the software to reinstall it. I cannot remove a CD or DVD. Y ou cannot remove a CD or DVD after yo u have tur ned off the HP Digital Entertainment Center . T urn on the HP Di gital Entertainment Center , and press the Eject button to extend the tray . Problem Solution
168 HP Digital Entertainment Center The memory card reader wonâ t read my memory cards. â The memor y card reader is a device th at uses the Safely Remove Hardware task. This appears as a Windows system tray icon next to the time. Do not click Stop in the Safely Remove Hardware window . If you do click Stop , the drive is disconnected. If this happens, restart the HP Digital Enter tainment Center . â Do n ot i ns er t o r r em o ve m em or y ca r ds w he n t he i n- us e li gh t is f la sh i ng . T o do so may cause data loss, or it may permanently damage the card reader . â Format a memor y card before you use it. Click Star t , and then click My Computer . Under Removable Storage, right-click the memor y card icon and select Format . Click Star t . Click OK on the Format Complete W indow , and then click Close to finish. â Some cards have a read/write or secu rity switch on the card. Make sure the read/write switch is set to W rite Enabled before attempting to write data to it. â Make sure the amount of data you ar e storing has not exceeded the storage limit of the card. â Make sure the memor y card is one of the supported types: CompactFlash I/II and Microdrive, Memor y Stick, Memor y Stick Pro, MultiMedia, Secure Digital, SmartMedia, or /xD. â Make sure the memor y card is fully inser ted into the correct slot. â Remove the memor y card when the light is not flashing, and shine a flashlight into the empty slot. If any of the pins are bent, have the HP Digital Entertainment Center ser viced if a pin is touching another pin. â Inspect the ends of the memor y cards fo r dirt or material closing a hole or spoiling a metal contact. Clean the cont acts with a lint-free cloth and small amounts of isopropyl alcohol. Replace the memor y card if necessar y . My video is experiencing errors. â Y our file may be corrupt or in an unsu pported format. Open the video file in a video editor such as WinDVD Creato r , and then resave the file in a supported for mat. â There may be a problem with the codec. For more information, look in Windows Media Player Help, and then search for codec . Codec errors are occurring when I play certain files. Codec is an abbreviation for compressor-decompressor . A codec is software or hardware used to compress and decompress digital media. If you get a codec error when playing an audio file, open the file in Windows Media Player . Configure Windows Media Player to automatically download codecs. Y ou must be connected to the Internet to download the codec file. Problem Solution
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 169 T roubleshooting My DVD wonâ t play . â Y ou can put data files on a DVD to stor e them or transfer them to another HP Digital Entertainment Center . However , data files on a DVD do not play in a DVD player . Rerecord your files to a fi le format that can be read by some DVD players. â If you are using component video output, you may need to change the configuration. See âComponent Vide o Settingsâ on page 60. Refer to http://www .hp.com/suppor t for additional information on using component video. â Check your DVD countr y/region. My DVD wonâ t play a DVD audio disk. This format is not suppor ted by the DVD player . I keep running out of disk space. â Burn some big files to DVD and remove them from your hard disk drive. â Upgrade your hard disk drive. The hard disk drive is user replaceable. I am getting disk errors. â Run disk recover y . â Replace your hard disk drive. The hard disk drive is user replaceable. My music files donâ t appear in the Media Library . â Make sure you use Windows Media Player to add your music files to the Media Librar y . â Check whether the Windows Media Player setting for access rights of other applications is set to No access . I t mus t be s et to Read only or Full access for your music files to appear . Refer to Windows Media Player Help for more information â Use supported audio file for mats. Refer to the HP T unes librar y . Problem Solution n If you need more information about using or troubleshooting Media Center , refer to the Media Center online Help or Help and Support in the Star t menu.
170 HP Digital Entertainment Center Getting Help Help and Suppor t Center For help, press the Help button on your keyboard, or click Start on the taskbar and select Help and Support . The Help and Support Center is onscreen Help information about your HP Digital Enter tainment Center . Here you can find: â Links to reinstall drivers. â Access to technical support options. â Answers to commonly asked questions about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o open the Help and Suppor t Center: 1 Press the Help button on your keyboard (the ? button). Or Start Media Center . Click the Help ( ? ) icon at the top left of the screen. Or Click Start on the taskbar , and click Help and Support . HP Suppor t HP Support provides impor tant support infor mation about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Here you can find: â Y our product number , model number , and serial number . â Registration information and link (monitor , keyboard, and mouse recommended). â Where to find more information about your HP Digital Entertainment Center . â An HP Digital Entertainment Center hardware test. â How to contact HP . T o open HP Suppor t: 1 Press Media Center on the remote control. Y ou can also click Star t on the taskbar , and select Media Center . 2 Click More Pr ograms , and then HP Support . 3 Select a program or folder: â Register Now â Learn More â Te s t H a r d w a r e â Contact HP
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 171 T roubleshooting W arranty and Support Guide See the HP Digital Entertainment Center W arranty and Support Guide , included with the documentation, for detailed information on: â HP W eb site Suppor t addresses â HP Support telephone numbers â HP Customer Care information â HP W eb site Online Guide addresses â Application and System Recover y programs â The terms of your HP limited warranty â License information HP W eb Site Suppor t The HP W eb site provides: â Supplemental information about the HP Digital Entertainment Center and products â HP Support contact information â Software updates â Software patches â Online Information and technical suppor t for your HP Digital Entertainment Center â Online manuals for your HP Digital Entertainment Center T o use the HP W eb site: 1 Connect to the Internet: Open your W eb browser . Or Press Connect on your keyboard. 2 Access the HP Support W eb site. T ype http://www .hp.com/suppor t into the W eb browser address box. Press Enter . 3 Select your countr y/region from the drop-down list. Press the arrow button next to the list. 4 Use the W eb site addresses listed in the W arranty and Support Guide for infor mation about your HP Digital Entertainment Center and your technical support needs.
172 HP Digital Entertainment Center HP Customer Care Y ou can get help over the telephone from HP . When you call HP Customer Care, have your model number and serial number available. See the keyboard or the W arranty and Support Guide for the support telephone numbers. Online Guides Y ou can find online guides and information for your HP Digital Entertainment Center . T o view online manuals for your HP Digital Entertainment Center , go to the Support W eb address that is listed in the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center , and then search for your product name and number . Online manuals are associated with specific HP Digital Entertainment Center model numbers. Some models may not have online manuals. Application and System Recover y Pr ograms The HP Digital Entertainment Center uses the operating system and installed software programs during normal operation. If your HP Digita l Entertainment Center works improperly or stops because of the software, you may be able to repair it by restarting the HP Digital Enter tainment Center , using System Restore, or using other methods including the System Recover y programs. Recover y discs (DVDs) are included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center system. Y ou need recovery discs for some repairs that use the system recover y programs. For instructions on using recover y discs, repairing and recovering your software, and more information, refer to the W arranty and Support Guide that came with your HP Digital Entertainment Center . Problems with software programs may be caused by corruption or damage to an individual program (application or software driver ) or to part of the operating system software.
Tr o u b l e s ho o t i n g 173 Updates fr om HP HP may send updated information or patches to your desktop (not available in all countries/regions). Y ou must be connected to the Internet to receive these updates. If you have turned off the Updates from HP feature, you will not receive these updates. T o turn updates back on: 1 Click Start , choose All Programs , and then HP Digital Entertainment Center Help & T ools . 2 Click Updates fr om HP , and then click Re-enable Updates from HP . Micr osoft W eb Site Search the Microsoft W eb site ( http://www .suppor t.microsoft.com ) for Knowledge Base articles and updates on Microsoft ® Win do ws ® XP Media Center Edition 2004. Y ou can also use the Online Spotlight link to get to the Microsoft Windows XP Media Center W eb site. T o get the latest news and information about your Microsoft Windows XP Media Center program: 1 Press the Media Center button on your remote control. 2 Select Online Spotlight from the Media Center Start menu.
174 HP Digital Entertainment Center
Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 175 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Impor tant Information About Recorded TV Pr ograms When you replace the hard disk drive, you lose any files or software that you created, saved, or installed on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . Because of this, you also lose a special code that Micros oft includes in the files of recorded TV programs. Without the code, Media Center cannot play TV programs previously recorded to disk or copied to DVD or to other media. For more information about safeguarding your recorded TV programs, refer to the Media Center Edition 2005 Software Guide . Pr ocedure Before you begin Replace the internal hard disk drive only if it has failed. Do not replace the internal hard disk drive until HP support has diagnosed it as the point of failure. HP recommends to upgrade hard disk drive capacity using the HP Personal Media Drive. Before you begin to replace the internal hard disk drive: 1 Make sure you have the recover y discs (DVDs) included with the HP Digital Entertainment Center system. 2 Back up your data to the Personal Media Drive or burn it to DVD. 3 Close Media Center and all other programs that may be accessing the hard disk drive. 4 T urn off the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 5 Disconnect the power cable from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 6 Disconnect all other cables from the HP Digital Entertainment Center . w Only advanced users should attempt to perform this procedure.
176 HP Digital Entertainment Center Removal T o remove the internal hard disk drive: 1 T urn the HP Digital Entertainment Center upside down. 2 Remove the hard disk drive cover from the chassis. After loosening the screw , sl ide the hard disk drive in the direction of the screw . 3 Lift up the hard disk drive from the chassis. 4 Disconnect the hard disk drive cables. 5 Remove the hard disk drive screws. A B A B
Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 177 Appendix A: Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Replacement T o replace the internal hard disk drive: 1 Replace the old hard disk drive with the new hard disk drive. 2 Replace the hard disk drive screws. T ighten the screws an additional half-turn only after the screws contact the rubber washer . 3 Reconnect the hard disk drive cables. 4 Place the hard disk drive into the chassis. Position the metal tabs. 5 Replace the hard disk drive cover on the chassis. A B A B
178 HP Digital Entertainment Center 6 T urn the HP Digital Entertainment Center right side up. 7 Reconnect the power cable and all other cables to the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 8 T urn on the HP Digital Entertainment Center . 9 T est the HP Digital Entertainment Center for proper operation. 10 Recover your system using the recover y disk. 11 Restore your data.
Index Index 179 Index Numerics 1/4 inch headphones 136 1394 7, 109 2.0 multichannel audio system 41 2.1 Home Stereo Installation 42 2.1 home stereo installation 41, 42 2.1 multichannel audio system 42 2.1 powered speaker 49 4.1 Home Theater Audio 43 4.1 powered speaker 50 5.1 home theater audio 44 5.1 multichannel audio system 44 5.1 powered speaker 51 5/4.1 home audio installation 43 7.1 Home Theater Audio 45 7.1 multichannel audio system 45 7.1 powered speaker 52 802.11 b/g 117 9-in-1 card readers 5 A active (powered) speakers 48 Additional equipment 32 adjusting desktop display resolution 144 front panel brightness 135 speaker volume 138 Adjusting the Volume 138 Alt F5 142 Analog Camcorder 112 Antenna (ATSC) 81 Antenna (NTSC and ATSC) 82 Antenna Connection 80 for FM radio 56 antennaweb.org 73 Application and System Recovery 172 Application Recovery 157 ATSC 73, 74 antenna 73 from VHF/UHF antenna 78 HDTV Channels 151 Audio 7.1 Pre-Out 6 audio configuration 136 Audio Connection Typical 38 audio files codec errors 168 do not appear in Media Library 169 Audio In connection 55 Audio Output 139 Audio Problems and Solutions 160 audio settings 139 Audio system equipment 32 Audio/Video flow 21 B back panel location of connections 6 system diagram 22 video connector locations 76 Basic Setup 27 Basic TV audio setup (2.0) 39 batteries 13 installing in keyboard 128 installing in remote control 16 replacing in keyboard 13 type for keyboard 13 for remote control 16 before you start additional items necessary 32 cables you may need 31 components supplied 29 safety information 17 Benefits 2 Brightness 135 brightness, adjusting front panel display 135 broadband Internet 113 Broadband Internet equipment 32 button functions, remote control 14 buttons configuring keyboard 154
180 HP Digital Entertainment Center C Cabinet back 26 Cabinet Front 25 Cable (NTSC) and UHF Antenna (ATSC) 83 cable box 71 cable modem 119, 120 cable modem, connecting 119 Cable Only (NTSC) 88 cable receiver dual tuner option 72 setting up using Media Center 132 Cable/Antenna In 8 cables included 30 not included 31 Camcorder 104 camcorders 101 camera connecting digital still 121 connecting digital video 109 capture 112 Center/Subwoofer 6 Changing screens 142 clearances, space for HP Digital Entertainment Center 28 cloning 142 Coaxial Splitter 30 codec errors 168 Color Correction 153 combination of Video 69 combinations 69 CompactFlash I/II 5 component video 60 Component Video Out 7 Component Video Settings 60 Composite 7 composite 75 Configuring Audio 136 for Media Center 140 for the DVD player 140 configuring Media Center audio settings 139 for cable or satellite receiver 132 for DVD player 140 for multichannel audio 140 for optional display 133 for your speaker setup 133 for your TV tuner and program guide 133 front panel display brightness 135 selecting recording devices 137 Configuring the Keyboard Buttons 154 Configuring the System 154 Configuring Video 141 Configuring Video Output and Source 141 Connecting headphones 136 TV Audio 39 VCRs 101 connecting 2.0 speaker system 41 2.1 speaker system with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 speaker system with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 speaker system with digital input on AV receiver 46 with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 speaker system with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 antenna, broadcast TV 80, 81, 82 cable boxes, two 86, 91 digital audio to AV receiver 46 DSL/cable modem 119 DVD player 103
Index 181 Index microphone 136 monitor speakers 54 powered speakers 48 router, to Internet through 119 satellite receiver, one 93 satellite receivers 95 tape player using Audio In connections 55 TV displays 58 TV to watch one channel and record on another 72 VCR with direct connections 105 video analog camera 112 video digital camera 109 video, overview 104 Connections 20 system diagram 22 Connections Donât Work 135 connector locations for audio output 34 for video output 59 on back panel 6 on front panel 3 contacting HP Customer Care by telephone 172 using the Web 171 Customer Care 172 D data files on DVDs, troubleshooting 169 Desktop Display 151 Desktop resolution 60 Device Manager 111 Digital 5.1 multichannel audio system 47 digital audio cable 46 digital audio system 53 digital audio, 5.1 supported formats 46 Digital home theater audio 46 Digital powered speaker 53 Digital Speakers 53 connecting 53 Digital Still Camera 121, 122 connection 121 Digital TV for Windows 74 Digital Video Camcorder 109 back panel 110 front panel 110 Digital Video Camera 122 Digital Video Out 7 Disabling the dual screen option 143 disconnect the TV 143 Display Overview 61 Display/video configuration 63 documentation how to find HP support information 171 how to find online manuals 172 Dolby Digital 46 DSL 119, 120 connecting 119 order of powerup 17 DTS Digital encoded audio 46 DTV 74 channels 151 dual displays 61 configuring with Media Center 133 disabling 143 switching between 142 Dual-tuner 72 DVD audio setting 139 DVD playback 60 DVD player 103 configuring audio settings 139 configuring using Media Center 140 location of connectors 103 troubleshooting 169 use with data files 169 DVD recovery discs 29 DVI 7 E error messages codec error when playing certain files 168 from hard drive 169 Ethernet 7 External hard disk drive 122
182 HP Digital Entertainment Center F FAQs, how to find 170 Fast Ethernet (100BaseT) 116 feature overview 2 Finding ATSC HDTV and Standard TV Channels 151 FireWire (IEEE 1394) 109 FireWire input-output, lo cation on front panel 4 flashlight 99 FM Antenna, connecting 56 FM radio antenna 56 Found New Hardware 121 Front 3, 6 Front Panel 3, 23, 156 Front Panel Display Brightness 135 front panel, adjusting display brightness 135 G Getting Help 170 Gigabit Ethernet (1000BaseT) 116 Guide, Television Program 151 H hard drive connecting HP Personal Media Drive 123 location on front panel 3 replacing 175, 176, 177 running out of disk space 169 troubleshooting 169 Hardware 111 hardware test, for HP Digital Entertainment Center 170 HDTV 74 antenna 73, 81 channels 75 HDTV (ATSC) In 8 HDTV and standard signal source â TV antenna 82 HDTV/SDTV Ant. In 77 headphones 136 location of output on front panel 4 help how to find 170 Microsoft Web site 173 Help and Support Center 170 High definition capable plasma, LCD, or HDTV display 58 high-definition TV 73 how to configure Media Center for cable or satellite receiver 132 for optional display 133 for your speaker setup 133 for your TV tuner and program guide 133 how to connect 2.0 speaker system 41 2.1 speaker system with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 speaker system with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 speaker system with digital input on AV receiver 46 with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 speaker system with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 broadcast antenna 80, 81, 82 cable boxes, two 86, 91 camera, digital still 121 camera, digital video 109 digital speakers 53 DSL/Cable modem 119 DVD player 103 FM radio 56 HP personal media drive 124 monitor speakers 54 powered speakers 48 remote IR 99 router, to a LAN through 120 satellite receiver, one 93 satellite receivers, two 95 USB devices 122 VCR 105
Index 183 Index how to find FAQs 170 help 170 HP Digital Entertainment Center hardware test 170 utility programs 156 how to obtain updates 173 how to register for updates 155 how to replace batteries in keyboard 13 batteries in remote control 16 hard drive 175, 176, 177 how to switch inputs using your monitor 69 how to switch between audio and video using your monitor 68 using your receiver 66 using your TV 64 how to switch between dual displays 142 how to synchronize, the keyboard 130 how to transfer PC data to HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 HP Application Recovery 172 HP Customer Care 172 contacting by telephone 172 HP Digital Entertainment Center box contents 29 recovery after a power outage 165 reset procedure 165 support for 170 HP Help and Support Center 170 HP Media Drive 124, 156 HP Personal Media Drive 123 automatic on and off feature 123 disconnecting 125 installing 124 running the media drive utility 124 utility 124 HP Settings 156 HP Support 170 HP Web site 171 HP Web Site Support 171 I Indicator light 10 Infrared Transmitter 97 Infrared Transmitter cable 99 Infrared Transmitter connection (one set-top box) 98 Infrared Transmitter connection (two set-top boxes) 98 Infrared Transmitter Installation 99 Infrared Transmitter sensor 99 Initial Configuration 127 initial Microsoft Windows setup screen 131 Initial Setup Wait Time 131 Installation Overview 19 installing additional software and devices 156 batteries in keyboard 16 batteries in remote control 128 HP Personal Media Drive 124 software 156 internal splitter 76 Internet connecting DSL/cable modem 119 connecting through a router 120 connection 117 service contract 117 typical configurations 116 iPod 122 IR Blaster 97 irrecoverable data loss ii K keyboard 122 batteries (Initial) 128 buttons 154 configuring buttons 154 function keys 10 replacing batteries 13 synchronizing 130, 166 troubleshooting 130, 166 Keyboard Connect button 12, 130
184 HP Digital Entertainment Center L LAN 117, 120 LED 5 light-emitting diode (LED) 5 location 24 M Media Center adjusting desktop display resolution 144 configuring audio settings 139 dual displays option disabling 143 enabling 142 Microsoft Web site 173 obtaining update information 173 registering for updates 155 testing system connections 135 utility programs 156 viewing on a second display 142 Media Center First Run 132 Media Center Setup Wizard 134 Media Center speaker settings 139 Media Center TV Program Guide 151 Media Center wizard 135 Media Library music files not displaying 169 troubleshooting 169 memory card reader location of slots on front panel 5 troubleshooting 168 Memory Stick (MS) 5 Microdrive 5 microphone 136 connecting 136 location of inputs on front panel 4 Microsoft Web site 173 information about Media Center 173 microsoft.com 74 mixer 55 MMC/SD 5 monitor 58 connecting 69 troubleshooting 167 Monitor Out 68 monitor speakers 54 Mouse 122 Mouse button 10 moving your files 155 MP3 player 122 MS/MS-Pro 5 MultiMediaCard 5 multiple audio/video inputs 64 N network 113 connections 116 connections supported 113 connectors location on back panel 115 on back panel 114 equipment 113 no picture 64 notes ii NTSC 72, 74 analog cable 78 cable 79 from VHF/UHF antenna 78 satellite 79 NTSC cable and ATSC antenna 78 NTSC cable and ATSC VHF/UHF antenna 83 nVidia 142 O On/Standby 10 On/Standby (power) button 129 One Cable Box (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) 84 One Cable TV box 89 One Cable TV or Digital Cable box (NTSC) 90 one satellite receiver 94 Online Guides 172 Online Spotlight 173 accessing using Media Center 173
Index 185 Open cabinet 25 open-back 24 optical cords 46 Optional set-up 133 overview connecting audio devices 34 connecting video equipment 104 features 2 TV signal source 72 video input connections 75 video out connections 58 P PC Doctor 157 PC Help & Tools 157 PC System Recovery 157 PDA 122 Performance and Maintenance 111 Peripheral Connection 114 peripheral devices 122 Personal Media Drive 123 pixels 151 Placement 25 power outage, recovery from 165 powered speaker 48 Powered speakers 54 premium channels 75 printer 122 connecting 122 troubleshooting 164 problems 159 Problems and Solutions 160 Product features 2 Program Guide, Television 151 Progressive scan 60 R receiver/amplifier 40 Recognizing the camcorder 111 Recorded TV Programs 175 recorded TV programs, protecting 175 recording devices 137 configuring with Media Center 137 recovery disc about 172 as used after replacing hard drive 178 supplied 29 recovery discs 172 recovery programs, using 157 registering for updates 155 Registering with HP 155 remote control 62, 97 button functions 14 installing batteries 16 maximum range 16 troubleshooting 163 using with your TV 62 Remote Control Batteries 16 Remote Control Buttons 14 remote IR transmitter cable connection connecting 99 importance of placement 97 location 98 relation to cable box and satellite receiver 97 troubleshooting 163 remote receiver 97 remove the HP Personal Media Drive 125 removing CD/DVD 167 personal media drive 123 replacing batteries in keyboard 13 batteries in remote control 16 hard drive 175, 176, 177 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 175 Required Setup 132 requirements, network connections 113 reset procedure, HP Digita l Entertainment Center 165 resolution 60 resolution, adjusting desktop display 144 retail VHS tapes 105 RJ-45 119 router 120 Router Internet connection 120 router, connecting to 120
186 HP Digital Entertainment Center S Safely Remove Hardware wizard 123 Safety and Comfort Guide 157 safety information 17 satellite receiver 71, 93 connecting one unit 93 connecting two units 95 dual tuner option 72 setting up using Media Center 132 Scan for hardware changes 111 Scanner 122 scanner connecting 122 SDTV 74 second display 142 select recording device 137 sensor, remote IR transmitter cable connection, connecting 99 set-top box 75 Setup 27 signal conversion 75 Signal Source 72 Single-tuner 72 SmartMedia (SM) 5 SmartMedia/xD 5 software 127, 156 speaker types, supported 35 speaker volume 138 speakers 2.0 system setup 41 2.1 system setup with passive speakers 42 with powered speakers 49 4.1 system setup with passive speakers 43 with powered speakers 50 5.1 system setup with digital speakers 53 with passive speakers 44 with powered speakers 51 7.1 system setup with passive speakers 45 with powered speakers 52 configuring audio settings 139 configuring using Media Center 133 connecting monitor speakers 54 testing using Media Center 140 troubleshooting surround sound 161 troubleshooting volume problems 160 Standard definition television 58 Start Here booklet 19 Starting the HP Digital En tertainment Center for the First Time 128 subwoofer for digital speaker setup 53 for monitor speaker installation 54 support for HP Digital Entertainment Center 170 supported 5.1 digital audio formats 46 network connection types 113 speaker types 35 surge protector 32, 129 Surround 6 Surround Back 6 surround sound, troubleshooting 161 S-video 75 adapter 75 connection requirements 58 jack and cable compatibility 103 location on front panel 4 to composite adapter 102 S-video Out 7 Switching 61 switching between dual displays 142 switching audio video using your monitor 68 using your receiver 66 using your TV 64 synchronizing the keyboard 130, 166 Syncing the Keyboard 130
Index 187 system components, inventory of 29 System Integration 20 System Problems and Solutions 164 System Recovery 172 System Restore 157, 172 System utilities 157 T tape player 55 connecting 55 Television Program Guide 151 testing audio settings using Media Center 140 system connections using Media Center 135 Titan TV 151 transfer wizard 155 transferring data from PC to HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 troubleshooting 159 audio problems 160 DVD player 169 hard drive 169 keyboard 166 memory card reader 168 monitor 167 music files 169 power up of HP Digital Entertainment Center 164 printer 164 remote control 163 remote sensor 163 removing CD/DVD 167 speaker volume 160 special keyboard buttons 166 surround sound 161 system connections using Media Center 135 TV problems 162, 167 unexpected startups 165 video errors 168 tuner configurations 72 Tuning the Desktop Display for S-video and Video (Composite) Connections 151 turning on location of power button 3 troubleshooting 164 turntable 55 TV adjusting desktop display resolution 144 antenna 80 Audio Connection 39 configuring with Media Center 133 disconnecting 143 Display 134 Program Guide 151 Source 71 Source Connectors 75, 76 Titan 151 troubleshooting 162, 167 viewing PC image on a second TV 142 TV and Monitor Out 70 TV Out (through AV receiver) 67 TV Source 1 In 8 TV Source 2 In 8 TV Source In 71 Two Cable Boxes (NTSC) and Antenna (ATSC) 86 Two Satellite Receivers 95 two screens 141 U UHF 73 Updates from HP 173 upmix 46, 52 USB 121 USB 2.0 7 USB 2.0 connectors 5 USB device connecting 122 USB device connection 122 USB drive 122 utility programs 156 location 156
188 HP Digital Entertainment Center V VCR 101, 104 connecting 105 Direct in 105 Ventilation 25 VGA Out 7 VHF 73 VHF Antenna (NTSC) 80 video analog camera, connecting 112 Video Camera 109 video configuration 141 video digital camera connecting 109 FireWire connection 4 troubleshooting connections 162 video display flickering 165 Video Equipment 32, 101 Connections 104 Overview 102 video image 152 video input 112 Video Out 58 Video Out Connectors 59, 63 Video out to high-definition capable HDTV 65 Video out to standard TV 65 Video Out to TV 64 Video Out to TV and Monitor 69 Video Problems and Solutions 162 video projector 64 video system errors 168 location of output connectors 58 Viewing the HP Digital Entertainment Center image on the TV 142 virus protection 155 need for 155 volume icon 138 locating on task bar 138 volume of speaker, adjusting 138 W Wall clearance 26 wall outlet 129 Wall to set-top box VCR to TV 108 Wall to VCR to TV 106 warnings ii against removing media while LED is blinking 5 disconnecting disk drive while it is operating 125 loss of recorded programs 175 moving personal media drive while it is operating 123 order of power connection 17 use of correct AC power source 17 Warranty and Support Guide 171 about 171 Web address for Media Center information 173 for registering your HP Digital Entertainment Center 155 Web site support, HP Customer Support 171 Welcome 1 Wi-Fi accessory box 118 Wi-Fi antenna 118 Windows Welcome 131 Wireless access point 117 wireless keyboard, location of LED 4 Wireless LAN 8, 117 Wireless network 117 Wireless or Ethernet (10BaseT) 116 wireless router 117 X xD media 5 XP Media Center Edition 2005 74 Y Y adapter cables 48 required for speakers 48 Y, Pb, Pr 58 Y/C video 77 Part Number: 5991-1774